s.  J . 


©p  ^.  •!.  pU  pbrarg 


jNortfj  Carolina  jiiaie  (Eollege 

55415 
P4-H£.fi 


SB  41 3 
F4H36 


-I^e__book   o 


IVERS1TY  LIBRARIES 


■■Hill 
S00828898   0 


fl» 

Date  Due 

1 . 

1 

2CJ04? 

i 

29&pv^ 

mje^SPj 

— eef- 

- — 9O1 

j?i99S_ 

i!  Z  ^ 

— Qtrf*^ 

Mrr* 

uy*L 

tffm 

1 — V** 

^ 

1 

THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 


THE 

PRACTICAL  BOOKS 

OF    HOME    LIFE    ENRICHMENT 

EACH    PROFUSELY    ILLUS- 
TRATED, HANDSOMELY    BOUND. 
Octavo.     Cloth.    In  a  slip  case. 

THE  PRACTICAL  BOOK  OF 
OUTDOOR  ROSE  GROWING 

By  GEORGE  C.  THOMAS,  Jr. 

De  Luxe  Fourth  Edition,  Net,  $6.00 
Garden  Edition,  Net,  $2.00 

THE  PRACTICAL  BOOK 
OF  EARLY  AMERICAN 
ARTS    AND    CRAFTS 

By  HAROLD  DONALDSON  EBERLEIN 
and  ABBOT  McCLURE 

Net,  $6.00 

THE  PRACTICAL  BOOK 
OF  ARCHITECTURE 

By  C.  MATLACK  PRICE 

Net,  $6.00 

THE  PRACTICAL  BOOK 
OF  ORIENTAL  RUGS 

By  DR.  G.  GRIFFIN  LEWIS 

New  Edition,  Revised  and  Enlarged 

Net,  $6.00 

THE  PRACTICAL  BOOK  OF 
GARDEN    ARCHITECTURE 

By  PHEBE  WESTCOTT  HUMPHREYS 

Net,  $6.00 

THE  PRACTICAL  BOOK 
OF  PERIOD  FURNITURE 

By  HAROLD  DONALDSON  EBERLEIN 
and  ABBOT  McCLURE 

A|  Net,  $6.00 

IN  PREPARATION 

THE  PRACTICAL  BOOK  OF 
INTERIOR   DECORATION 

By  EBERLEIN,  McCLURE  &  HOLLO  WAY 

J.  B.  LIPPINCOTT  COMPANY 

PUBLISHERS  PHILADELPHIA 


\M^J*^Kl4^(^M^ 


THE  BOOK  OF 
THE  PEONY 

MRS.  EDWARD  HARDING 


I 


S 


PP/TH  20  ILLUSTRATIONS  IN  FULL  COLOUR 
22  IN  DOUBLETONE  AND  A  MAP 


^ 


PHILADELPHIA  AND  LONDON 
J.  B.  LIPPINCOTT  COMPANY 

1917 


mmm^mmiEmmmmm 


COPYRIGHT,  1917,  BY  J.  B.  LIPPINCOTT  COMPANY 


PUBLISHED  MARCH,  1917 


PRINTED   BY  J.  B.  LIPPINCOTT  COMPANY 

AT  THE  WASHINGTON  SQUARE  PRESS 

PHILADELPHIA,  U.  S.  A. 


PREFACE 

ALTHOUGH  the  peony  has  been  a  favourite 
X~\.m  gardens  for  very  many  years,  and  although 
experts  and  hybridisers  have  been  developing  and 
improving  the  flower  for  over  half  a  century,  no 
book  has  yet  been  published  containing  the  widely 
scattered  facts  as  to  its  history  and  cultivation. 

In  France  and  England  both  amateur  and 
professional  horticulturists  lavished  time  and  de- 
votion on  its  improvement.  The  marked  success 
attained  by  them  in  producing  incredibly  beau- 
tiful types  caused  the  greater  appreciation  of  the 
peony  to  extend  to  this  country.  In  America 
such  men  as  Richardson,  Hollis  and  Terry  have 
done  work  along  similar  lines  to  that  of  the  foreign 
experts. 

The  peony — at  present  extensively  grown — 
is  constantly  and  rapidly  increasing  in  popularity. 
Certain  enthusiastic  commercial  growers  have 
made  peonies  their  specialty — sometimes  peonies 
alone  and  sometimes  peonies  together  with  a  few 
other  perennials.     Their  judgment  in  specialis- 


24: 


PREFACE 

ing  has  been  proved  sound  by  events :  on  the  lists 
of  some  of  these  growers  there  are  more  than 
ten  thousand  names  of  active  customers.  Hun- 
dreds of  acres  are  planted  to  peonies  to  supply 
the  demand. 

The  annual  exhibition  and  the  publications  of 
the  American  Peony  Society  have  done  much  to 
awaken  the  interest  of  those  who  have  had  but 
a  slight  acquaintance  with  this  flower.  Many 
persons,  vastly  surprised  on  seeing  the  improved 
varieties  for  the  first  time,  complain  at  not  hav- 
ing been  sooner  shown  the  sources  of  pleasure 
that  the  peony  holds. 

Because  of  the  lack  of  easily  accessible  in- 
formation, until  now  the  knowledge  of  a  finer 
cultivation  of  the  peony  has  remained  the  prop- 
erty of  the  comparatively  small  number  who  have 
made  its  growing  either  a  hobby  or  a  business. 
Fortunately  the  peony  is  a  very  hardy  and 
friendly  flower  that  does  its  cheerful  best  to  bloom 
even  though  neglected.  When  attention  such  as 
is  ungrudgingly  expended  upon  less  responsive 
flowers  is  bestowed  upon  the  peony,  its  gratitude 
finds  expression  in  an  increased  loveliness  which 
is  more  than  sufficient  reward. 


PREFACE 

With  the  hope  of  bringing  the  modern  peony 
before  those  who  do  not  know  it,  this  book  has 
been  planned.  The  ever-widening  interest  in  gar- 
dening and  the  serious  and  thorough  work  of 
amateurs  to-day  encourage  me  to  believe  that 
what  I  have  written,  because  I  love  the  peony, 
will  be  of  interest  and  help  to  others. 

To  Mr.  B.  H.  Farr  of  Wyomissing,  Penn- 
sylvania, my  thanks  are  due  for  the  auto- 
chrome  of  the  rare  and  beautiful  P.  lutea.  To 
Mr.  A.  H.  Fewkes  of  Newton  Highlands,  to 
Mr.  Theodore  Hobby  of  the  Metropolitan 
Museum  of  Fine  Arts  and  to  Mr.  Morris  Earle 
of  Williams,  Brown  and  Earle,  Philadelphia, 
my  deep  appreciation  of  their  interest  and  kind- 
ness is  expressed. 

I  especially  wish  to  acknowledge  my  indebted- 
ness to  Mr.  George  H.  Peterson  of  Fair  Lawn, 
New  Jersey.  As  typical  blooms  from  my  own 
recently  transplanted  beds  were  unobtainable,  the 
illustrations  in  this  book,  with  a  few  exceptions, 
were  secured  through  Mr.  Peterson's  generous 
courtesy. 

The  carefully  prepared  Bulletins  on  the  Clas- 
sification, etc.,  of  the  Peony — the  work  of  Dr.  J. 

7 


PREFACE 

Eliot  Coit  and  Mr.  Leon  D.  Batchelor — have 
been  of  great  assistance  to  me. 

I  also  desire  to  extend  my  thanks  to  Dr.  H. 
H.  Whetzel  for  permission  to  reprint  his  Bulle- 
tin on  the  Diseases  of  the  Peony. 

Alice  Harding 

Burnley  Farm 
February,  1917 


CONTENTS 


CHAPTER  PAGE 

I.  An  Appreciation  of  the  Peony 13 

II.  The  Mythology,  Ancient  and  Modern  History  of  the 

Peony 25 

III.  Best  Varieties  and  Their  Characteristics 69 

IV.  Extending  the  Period  of  Bloom 103 

V.  Purchasing 117 

VI.  Where  to  Plant  and  How  to  Prepare  the  Soil 133 

VII.  Planting  and  Cultivation 149 

VIII.  Propagation 173 

IX.  The  Tree  Peony — Description  and  History 185 

X.  Tree    Peonies:      Cultivation,    Propagation    and    Best 

Varieties 207 

XI.  Various  Species  of  the  Peony 221 

Appendix 231 

Index 255 


ILLUSTRATIONS 

COLOUR  PLATES 

PAGE 

Modele  de  Perfection Frontispiece 

solfatare 16 

Adolphe  Rousseau 18 

Reine  Hortense 28 

Mrs.  McKinley 34 

Souvenir  de  l'Exposition  Universelle 46 

Stephania 58 

Felix  Crousse 62 

Suzanne  Dessert 78 

P.  Tenuifolia 106 

P.  Officinalis 110 

P.    SUFFRUTICOSA    OR   MoUTAN,    "CAROLINE   D'lTALIE 112 

P.   LUTEA 114 

Gloire  de  Chas.  Gombault 122 

Alice  de  Julvecourt 128 

Philomele 138 

Madame  de  Vatrt 152 

Madame  Bucquet 156 

Asa  Gray 170 

Porcelain  of  the  Kang  Hsi  Period  (1662-1796) 188 

HALFTONE  PLATES 

couronne  d'or 30 

Marie  Jacquin 38 

Page  from  Herbarius  of  Arnoldus  de  Villanova,  Published 

in  1484 40 

Page  from  Gerard's  Herbal,  Published  in  England  in  1597    42 

duchesse  de  nemours 50 

Aurore 54 

Festiva  Maxima 72 

Sarah  Bernhardt 80 

Le  Printemps 108 

Madame  Lemonier 122 

11 


ILLUSTRATIONS  12 

PAGE 

Madame  Calot 124 

Peonies   in   Landscape  Planting   on   Miss   Morris's   Estate 

Near  Philadelphia 136 

Claire  Dubois 144 

Stalk  of  Albiflora  Showing  Terminal  Bud  Which  Should  be 
Left  and  Lateral  Buds  Which  Should  be  Removed  or 

Pinched  Off 162 

Dormant  Healthy  Peony  Root 162 

Madame  D.  Treyeran 166 

La  Tulipe 176 

Unnamed  Seedling  of  Herbaceous  Peony,  Single  Type 180 

Madame  Jules  Dessert 182 

P.  Moutan  (Tree  Peony) 202 

Reine  Elizabeth 210 

Diseases  of  the  Peony 237 

MAP 

Showing  Localities  in  Which  the  Most  Important  Peonies 

are  Native 26 


AN  APPRECIATION  OF 
THE  PEONY 


THE  BOOK  OF 
THE  PEONY 

CHAPTER  I 
AN  APPRECIATION  OF  THE  PEONY l 

"  Full  of  set  flowers, 
Full  is  my  chamber ; 
Thou  art  most  stately, 
White  peony." 

— Hakku. 

THE  peony  of  to-day — too  little  known  and 
too  seldom  sung — the  brilliant  result  of  years 
of  steadfast  devotion  and  untiring  effort  on  the 
part  of  peony  lovers  and  hybridisers,  is  the  most 
superb  and  commanding  flower  which  the  garden 
holds.  The  iris,  Oriental  poppy,  fox-glove,  holly- 
hock, lily,  dahlia  and  chrysanthemum  each  has  its 
own  special  radiance,  yet  each  is  surpassed  by 
the  peony  with  its  magnificence  of  mass  and  per- 

1  I  have  adopted  the  spelling  generally  used  in  this 
country  and  approved  by  the  Century  Dictionary.  In 
England  "  paeony  "  is  the  customary  spelling.  The 
botanical  name  is  Paeonia. 

15 

PHOFERTY  LIBRARY 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

fection  of  detail.  The  rose,  fine,  exquisite  and 
fragrant  as  it  is,  must  yield  first  rank  to  the  mod- 
ern peony,  which  by  reason  of  its  sheer  wealth 
of  splendour  and  majesty  of  presence  is  now 
entitled  to  be  called  the  Queen  of  Flowers. 

The  compelling  charm  of  the  improved  types 
of  peony  lies  not  only  in  their  grace  and  comeli- 
ness, but  in  the  infinite  variety  of  both  flowers 
and  foliage.  Starting  with  single  blooms,  like 
huge  anemones,  through  semi-double  flowers,  re- 
sembling water-lilies,  and  various  enchanting 
forms  of  doubling  up  to  the  solid  mass  of  petals, 
as  in  Avalanche,  the  peony  holds  one  spell-bound 
in  admiration.  The  wide  diversity  of  foliage  and 
habit  of  growth  makes  the  plants  an  object  of 
alluring  interest.  The  leaves  of  certain  sorts  of 
peony  are  much  divided  and  fern-like;  of  others, 
broad  and  strong  with  leathery  quality.  Usually 
varnished  and  lustrous,  they  run  in  colour  range 
through  many  shades  of  green — often  tinged  with 
copper  or  with  red.  Some  kinds  are  dwarf  and 
bushy;  some  of  medium  height  and  spreading 
growth,  and  others  tall  with  a  bold  outline.  All, 
however,  have  an  air  of  sturdy  character  and  self- 
reliance. 

16 


SOLFATARE 

(Calot,  1861) 

Bomb  type.     A  peony  of  exquisite  beauty  and  distinction 


AN  APPRECIATION  OF  THE  PEONY 

Fondly  as  I  esteem  the  rose — heretofore  the 
accepted  standard  of  loveliness — I  feel  that  the 
peony  has  the  advantage  over  it,  not  only  in  su- 
periority of  flowers,  but  in  other  important  points. 
The  peony  has  no  thorns  to  surprise  or  cause 
dismay.  After  the  peony  blooms  its  foliage  re- 
mains an  adornment — a  contrast  to  the  small  and 
scanty  leaves  of  the  rose,  which  are  often  dis- 
figured and  unsightly.  All  through  the  garden 
season  the  peony  has  a  landscape  value  which  the 
rose  lacks.  And,  last  but  not  least,  the  peony 
requires  neither  spraying  nor  pruning:  to  the 
conscientious  owner,  burdened  with  the  number- 
less details  of  spring  garden-keeping,  this  is  a 
welcome  relief. 

Fifty  years  ago  the  word  peony  meant  one 
thing:  it  referred  to  the  red  "  piney  "  of  unfra- 
grant  memory,  which,  though  highly  prized  and 
desirable  at  that  date,  suffers  when  compared 
with  the  beauties  of  to-day.  Now  the  word  peony 
conjures  up  a  large  variety  of  shapely  flowers 
packed  with  glossy  silken  petals  in  a  hundred 
shades,  tints,  and  combinations  of  white,  pink, 
yellow  and  red.  One  who  sees  for  the  first  time 
typical  specimens  of  the  modern  peony  is  thrilled 

2  17 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

with  their  breath-taking  loveliness:  even  those 
who  know  well  all  the  fascinations  of  the  flower 
are  stirred  by  it  to  new  wonder  and  delight  each 
recurring  year. 

Lest  I  be  thought  too  loud  in  my  praises  of 
the  peony,  I  will  quote  from  one  of  many  enthusi- 
astic authorities — a  book,  too,  which  is  not  essen- 
tially a  horticultural  work.  No  one,  I  venture, 
will  consider  the  Encyclopaedia  Britannica  given 
to  exaggeration  in  its  statements,  yet  this  is  what 
it  says  about  the  peony: 

"  Pyeony  (botanically  Paeonia;  Nat.  ord.  Ranuncula- 
cese  q.  v.),  a  genus  of  plants  remarkable  for  their  large 
and  gorgeous  flowers.  There  are  two  distinct  sorts, 
one  of  the  strong-growing  herbaceous  kind,  with  fleshy 
roots  and  annual  stems,  derived  mainly  from  Paeonia 
albiflora  and  P.  officinalis;  the  other,  called  the  tree 
peony,  stiff-growing  plants  with  half-woody  permanent 
stems,  which  have  sprung  from  the  Chinese  P.  moutan. 

"  The  herbaceous  paeonies  usually  grow  from  %  to  3 
ft.  in  height,  and  have  large,  much-divided  leaves,  and 
ample  flowers  of  varied  and  attractive  colors,  and  of  a 
globular  form  in  the  double  varieties,  which  are  those 
most  prized  in  gardens.  They  usually  blossom,  in  May 
and  June,  and  as  ornaments  for  large  beds  in  pleas- 
ure grounds,  and  for  the  front  parts  of  shrubberies, 
few  flowers  equal  them  in  gorgeous  effect. 

"  The  older  varieties  of  P.  albiflora  include  Candida, 
18 


ADOLPHE   ROUSSEAU 

(Dessert  and  Meehin,  1890) 

Semi-double  type.     One  of  the  finest  reds.     Blooms  freely 


AN  APPRECIATION  OF  THE  PEONY 

Humei,  Whitleyi,  etc.;  those  of  P.  officinalis  embrace 
albicans,  anemoniflora,  sabini,  etc.  The  garden  varie- 
ties of  modern  times  are,  however,  still  more  beautiful, 
the  flowers  being  in  many  instances  delicately  tinted 
with  more  than  one  color,  such  as  buff  with  bronzy 
centre,  carmine  with  yellowish  centre,  rose  with  orange 
centre,  white  tinted  with  rose,  etc.     . 

"  The  moutans,  or  tree  peonies,  are  remarkable  for 
their  sub-shrubby  habit,  forming  vigorous  plants  some- 
times attaining  a  height  of  6  to  8  ft.,  and  producing  in 
May,  magnificent  flowers  which  vary  in  color  from  white 
to  lilac,  purple  magenta,  violet  and  rose.     .     .     ." 

Even  had  one  never  seen  the  flower,  such  fer- 
vour from  a  mere  encyclopaedia  would  awaken  in- 
stant interest. 

For  those  who  as  yet  know  the  peony  only 
in  a  general  way,  I  will  set  out  in  orderly  array 
no  less  than  seven  distinct  and  excellent  reasons 
for  considering  the  peony  the  best  of  all 
perennials  : 

I.  The  sightly  appearance  of  its  blooms 

The  elegance  of  the  flower,  its  different  forms,  the 
satiny  texture  of  the  petals  and  the  numerous  tints 
and  shades  of  white,  pink  and  red  make  its  fair- 
ness a  never-ending  joy. 

In  many  kinds  there  is  also  found  fragrance  equal 
to  that  of  the  rose. 

19 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

2.  Its  worth  for  both  landscape  "and  cutting 

Both  in  mass  and  in  detail,  it  answers  many  re- 
quirements. The  substantial  size  of  the  plant 
and  of  the  individual  flowers  makes  it  a  useful  and 
striking  subject  for  the  garden  architect.  The 
brightness,  sweetness  and  lasting  qualities  of  the 
blooms  make  it  an  ideal  cut  flower. 

2.  The  freshness  of  its  foliage  throughout  the  summer 

A  number  of  perennials  lose  the  freshness  of  their 
foliage  after  blooming  and  have  to  be  cut  back  or 
hidden  by  other  plants.  Except  in  one  or  two  in- 
stances, the  shining  foliage  of  the  peony  attracts 
attention  from  the  time  of  its  appearance  above 
ground  until  it  succumbs  to  the  late  frosts. 

4.  The  ease  of  its  culture 

Any  one  can  raise  peonies  successfully  with  far 
less  trouble  than  it  takes  to  grow  roses. 

5.  Its  practical  freedom  from  insects  and  disease 

While  a  number  of  diseases  of  the  peony  have  been 
classified  and  described,  the  grower  who  reads  and 
heeds  directions  is  not  likely  to  be  troubled  with 
diseased  plants. 

6.  Its  extreme  hardiness 

It  thrives  in  very  severe  climates,  and  endures  a 
degree  of  cold  that  is  fatal  to  many  other  per- 
ennials. 


AN  APPRECIATION  OF  THE  PEONY 
7.  Its  permanence 

Lifting  and  dividing  the  roots  are  not  necessary 
for  at  least  eight  or  ten  years.  Many  varieties  can 
be  left  undisturbed  for  fifteen  years  or  more. 

The  peony  has  but  two  drawbacks — which  can 
hardly  be  considered  objections.  ( 1 )  It  increases 
slowly.  (2)  The  stems  of  some  varieties  are  not 
strong  enough  to  bear  the  weight  of  the  large 
flowers  and  must  be  supported. 

As  far  back  as  1629,  peonies  were  so  well 
liked  and  so  much  planted  in  gardens  that  John 
Parkinson  in  his  quaint  book  on  plants,  "  Paradisi 
in  Sole,  Paradisus  Terrestris,  or  a  Choice  Garden 
of  all  Sorts  of  Rarest  Flowers,"  gives  descrip- 
tions of  six  different  kinds  with  four  interesting 
pictures.  Referring  to  "  Peeonia  femina  vulgaris 
flore  plena  rubra,"  which  closely  resembles  and 
in  all  probability  was  P.  officinalis,  he  says:  "This 
double  peony,  as  well  as  the  former  single  ( Pseonia 
femina  Byzantina — the  single  red  Peony  of  Con- 
stantinople) is  so  frequent  in  every  garden  of 
note,  through  every  country,  that  it  is  almost 
labour  in  vaine  to  describe  it:  but  yet  because  I 
use  not  to  pass  over  any  plant  so  lightly  I  will 
set  down  the  description  briefly  in  regard  it  is 
21 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

so  common."  A  little  further  along  he  breaks 
through  his  scholarly  reserve  with  true  horticul- 
tural ardour,  and  expresses  his  real  regard  for 
the  peony  by  exclaiming,  "  no  flower  that  I  know 
so  faire,  great  and  double."  I  wish  that  it  were 
possible  for  Parkinson  to  see  the  peonies  of  to- 
day, but  I  doubt  if  he  could  phrase  his  admiration 
any  more  charmingly  than  he  did  for  the  less 
wonderful  peony  of  1629. 

As  the  horses  never  trot  so  fast  as  around  the 
fire  in  the  Winter,  so  the  peonies  never  bloom  so 
large  and  perfectly  as  in  one's  vision  of  the  season 
to  come.  After  one's  appreciation  of  and  enthusi- 
asm for  the  peony  are  fully  awakened,  there  is 
not  a  week  in  the  year  when  the  flower  is  not  a 
pleasure.  At  all  times,  night  or  day,  Winter 
or  Summer,  one  can  in  absorbing  study  be 
amongst  the  peonies  and  in  imagination  behold 
them  again  in  all  their  sumptuousness. 

When  the  Spring  is  here  at  last,  and  the  earth 
has  its  indescribable  scent  of  warmth  and  sweet- 
ness, I  hasten  to  my  peony  garden  to  see  if  the 
first  coral  tips  have  broken  through  the  ground. 
After  a  few  days,  becoming  impatient,  I  loosen 
the  soil  and  dig  quietly  and  gently,  until  I  find 
the  little  red  points  that  will  soon  grow  into  sharp 

22 


AN  APPRECIATION  OF  THE  PEONY 
red  spears.  Then,  reassured  that  they  are  really 
coming,  in  spite  of  the  long  time  Winter  has  held 
them  on  the  way,  I  cover  them  up  and  go  away 
content.  On  that  day,  for  me,  the  garden  season 
begins. 

I  know  of  no  plant  that  is  so  satisfyingly 
beautiful  in  every  stage  of  its  development.    The 
changing  of  the  shades  of  red,  green,  copper  and 
bronze  of  the  young  stems  and  foliage,  the  slow 
unfolding  of  the  leaves  of  fine  design  are  ex- 
quisite in  themselves— and  yet  they  are  but  a  pre- 
lude to  the  burst  of  glory  in  the  flowers.    When 
the  blossoms  appear,  it  is  indeed  hard  to  leave 
the  garden:  no  matter  how  many  times  a  day 
one  gazes  at  them,  there  is  something  newly  en- 
trancing on  each  successive  glance.     There  is 
one  peony  lover,  bewitched  by  their  spell,  who, 
loath  to  leave  them  for  even  a  few  hours,  makes 
the  rounds  of  her  garden  every  night  with  a  lan- 
tern.   This  mistress  of  a  much-cherished  garden 
often  rises  to  listen  to  the  birds  and  see  her  peonies 
at  dawn.     The  piercing  tenderness  of  the  wood- 
thrush's  song,  the  dream-like  purity  of  the  peon- 
ies, the  inspiration  of  the  summer  morning,  bring 
a  happiness  that  is  poignant,  a  thankfulness  for 
life  that  is  ecstasy  itself. 


is 


tuomrr  imARY 

JV.  C  State  Cuiugt 


THE  MYTHOLOGY,  AND 

ANCIENT  AND  MODERN 

HISTORY  OF  THE  PEONY 


CHAPTER  II 

THE  MYTHOLOGY,  AND  ANCIENT  AND  MODERN 
HISTORY  OF  THE  PEONY 

THE  peony  has  been  such  a  familiar  flower 
in  humble  gardens  in  this  country  that 
many  persons  are  not  aware  of  its  aristocratic 
and  extended  genealogy.  The  descent  of  the 
peony  can  be  traced  through  numerous  periods 
of  history  even  into  mythology;  indeed  in  Greece, 
the  Roman  Empire,  China,  Japan,  France,  Eng- 
land and  America,  its  relation  to  mankind  has 
been  considerable. 

In  medicine,  art,  commerce  and  science,  the 
peony  has  played  a  part  which  not  only  entitles 
it  to  general  recognition,  but  which  is  also  ab- 
sorbing in  detail.  At  different  times  in  the  past, 
it  has  been  the  object  of  many  journeys  and  voy- 
ages, the  subject  of  years  of  painstaking  study, 
and  to  its  improvement  men  have  lovingly  de- 
voted a  large  portion  of  their  lives.  From  Leto, 
mother  of  Apollo,  who  appears  to  have  been  the 
original  "  introducer  "  of  the  peony,  down  to  M. 
Dessert,  the  great  French  grower,  who  in  1915 

27 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

sent  out  his  latest  peony  under  the  name  of  "  Vic- 
toire  de  la  Marne,"  we  have  a  long  and  entertain- 
ing story,  of  both  horticultural  and  human 
interest. 

For  greater  convenience  and  clearness  I  have 
set  out  in  tabular  form  some  of  the  facts  one 
should  have  in  mind  in  order  to  read  without  con- 
fusion the  complete  history  of  the  "  peony  " — 
which  generic  name  includes  several  species,  each 
with  a  separate  record. 

Tabulation  of  Principal  Species  of  Peonies 
I.  Herbaceous  Peonies 

These  are  bushy  plants  two  to  four  and  one- 
half  feet  high  that  die  down  to  the  ground  in 
the  Autumn.      When  the  word  "  peonies  "  is 
used  reference  generally  is  made  to  herbaceous 
peonies  (in  distinction  to  tree  peonies). 
1.  P.  officinalis    (of    the   apothecaries'   offices   or 
shops — used  for   medicinal  purposes) — see 
colour  plate — the  red  single  or  double  peony 
of  old-fashioned  gardens.     White  single  and 
double  varieties  have   also  been  known  for 
over  three  hundred  years. 
This  species  is  a  native  of  southern  Europe  and 
is  the  peony  of  mythology  and  of  Greek  and 
Latin  literature.     It  is  grown  to  some  extent 
in  gardens  now.     This  species  gave  the  genus 
its  name. 


REINE  HORTENSE 
(Calot,  1857) 

Semi-rose  type.     Considered  by  many  the  finest  pink  peony.     It  has  form,  fragrance,  strong  stems  and 
free-blooming  qualities 


MYTHOLOGY,  AND  HISTORY  OF  THE  PEONY 

2.  P.  albiflora  (white  flowered) — Improved  type — 
(see   frontispiece   and  numerous   other   col- 
our plates  and  half-tones),  with  red,  pink, 
white,   mauve   or  yellowish   flowers    of    sev- 
eral forms,  single,  semi-double,  crown,  bomb, 
rose,    etc.,    and    many    of    them    fragrant. 
This  is  the  most  important  and  interesting 
species  of  the  herbaceous  group  and  is  the 
principal  one  grown  to-day.    It  is  sometimes 
called  P.  sinensis  or  Chinese  peony. 
The  primitive  type  of  P.   albiflora — from  its 
name,  presumably  white — is  a  native  of  a  vast 
range   of  territory    from   the   central   regions 
of  Siberia  to  central  China.     Its  early  history 
is   entirely   in   China   and   Japan:  it  was   not 
known  in  Europe  prior  to  1656. 

The  improved  type  was  obtained: 

(a)  By  importation  into  Europe  from 
Siberia  or  China  about  1850. 

(b)  By  crossing  P.  albiflora  (either  the 
imported  primitive  type  or  the  im- 
ported improved  type)  and  certain 
little-known  species,  e.g.,  P.  pere- 
grina  {foreign),  P.  arietina  (ram's 
horn  fruited),  etc. 

(c)  By  crossing  P.  albiflora  (either  the 
imported  primitive  type  or  the  im- 
ported improved  type)  and  P.  offici- 
nalis. This  crossing,  done  chiefly 
since  1850,  is  probably  the  origin  of 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

most  of  the  beautiful  double  kinds  of 
to-day  with  their  varied  forms  and 
exquisite  colourings. 

3.  P.  tenuifolia  (narrow-leaved) — see  colour  plate 

— introduced  into  England  in  1765  from  the 
Caucasus. 

4.  P.    Wittmaniana    (Wittman's) — A    pale    yellow 

peony.  Discovered  in  the  Caucasus  about 
1842.  One  of  the  parents  of  the  desirable 
Wittmaniana  hybrids. 

5.  P.  Emodi  (Mt.  Emodus),  the  only  peony  native 

to  India. 

6.  P.  anomala  (unusual),  P.  corallina  (coral  red 

— referring  to  the  seeds),  P.  decora 
(comely),  P.  peregrina  (foreign),  P. 
Brownii  (Brown's) — the  only  peony  native 
to  America — and  others,  are  less  important 
species  from  a  gardening  standpoint.1 
II.  Tree  Peonies 

These  have  woody  stems  that  do  not  die  down 
to  the  ground  in  the  Autumn.    They  have  been 
much  cultivated  in  China  and  Japan  for  many 
centuries. 
1.  P.  suffruticosa  (woody)  or  P.  moutan — see  col- 
our plate — with  large  flowers  (eight  to  ten 
inches    across),    of   various    shades    of   red, 
white,  pink,  salmon  and  purple. 
A  native  of  the  central  part  of  western  China, 
it  was  first  exported  to  Japan  in  724 ;  and  first 
exported  to  England   (and  thence  to   France 
and  the  United  States)  in  1787. 

1  A  list  of  these  is  given  in  Chapter  XI. 


COURONNE  D'OR 

(Calot,  1872) 

Semi-rose  type.     A  white  peony  of  distinction  and  beauty  which  can  be  bought  at  a  low  cost 


MYTHOLOGY,  AND  HISTORY  OF  THE  PEONY 

2.  P.  lutea  (yellow) — see  colour  plate.  Discovered 
in  southern  China  in  1882. 
The  main  portion  of  this  book  is  devoted  to 
herbaceous  peonies.  Two  chapters  (IX  and 
X)  cover  tree  peonies  exclusively — their  de- 
scription, history,  planting,  cultivation,  propa- 
gation and  best  varieties. 

The  Peony  in  Mythology  and  in  the 
Classics 

Zeus  and  Leto  were  the  parents  of  Apollo, 
god  of  healing,  who  was  the  father  of  iEsculapius, 
god  of  medicine.  According  to  the  ancient  writers, 
Pseon,  pupil  of  iEsculapius  and  physician  of  the 
gods,  first  received  the  peony  on  Mt.  Olympus 
from  the  hands  of  Leto.  With  it  he  cured  Pluto 
of  a  wound  inflicted  by  Hercules  during  the  Tro- 
jan war.  To  quote  from  Homer's  Iliad  with  its 
stirring  action:  "  Pluto  also  endured  a  swift  shaft 
when  the  same  hero  (Hercules)  the  son  of  iEgis- 
bearing  Jove,  afflicted  him  with  pains  at  Pylos 
amongst  the  dead.  But  he  went  to  the  palace  of 
Jove  on  lofty  Olympus,  grieving  in  his  heart  and 
transfixed  with  pain;  for  the  shaft  had  pierced 
into  his  huge  shoulder  and  tortured  his  soul.    But 

31 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

Paeon  healed  him,  applying  pain-assuaging 
remedies."  2 

This  cure  caused  so  much  envy  in  the  breast  of 
iEsculapius  that  he  secretly  plotted  the  death  of 
Paeon:  probably  the  first  recorded  instance  of 
professional  jealousy.  But  the  wicked  plotter 
was  destined  to  be  foiled.  Pluto,  in  gratitude  for 
what  Paeon  had  done,  saved  the  physician  from 
the  fate  of  mortals  by  changing  him  into  the  plant 
that  had  been  used  in  the  cure.  This  plant  has 
ever  since  borne  Paeon's  name.3 

The  history  of  the  cognate  word  paean  is  in- 
teresting as  showing  some  of  the  possibilities  of 
etymology.  After  the  time  of  Homer,  the  name 
of  healer  and  the  office  of  healing  were  trans- 
ferred from  Paeon  to  Apollo,  who  was  thence- 

2  Iliad,  5,  401,  etc.  Another  apparent  instance  of 
the  peony's  efficacy  as  a  cure  for  wounds  is  also  given 
in  the  Iliad  (5,  899,  etc.).  "  So  spake  he  (Jove)  and 
bade  Paeon  heal  him  (Mars).  And  Paeon  laid  assuaging 
drugs  upon  the  wounds  and  healed  him  seeing  he  was 
in  no  wise  of  mortal  mould.  Even  as  fig  juice  rapidly 
thickens  white  milk  that  is  liquid  before  but  curdleth 
while  one  stirreth  it,  even  so  swiftly  healed  he  impetuous 
Mars." 

3  The  Latin  name  Paeonia  is  the  feminine  of  Paeonius 
— "  belonging  to  Pason." 

32 


MYTHOLOGY,  AND  HISTORY  OF  THE  PEONY 

forth  invoked  by  the  cry  "  Io  Paean  "  (ni  6aidv) 
sometimes  made  to  him  as  physician  and  at  other 
times  made  to  him  irrespective  of  his  healing  art. 
Subsequently,  a  paean  was  a  choral  song  to  Apollo 
or  Artemis,  his  twin-sister  (the  burden  being  "  Io 
Paean"),  in  thanksgiving  for  deliverance  from 
evil.  Later  it  was  addressed  to  other  gods  on 
similar  occasions,4  and  then  to  mortals.  Now  it 
is  a  "  loud  and  joyous  song  ":  witness  this  book. 

The  peony  was  known  to  Greek  writers  under 
the  name  paeonia  and  also  under  the  name  glu- 
cuside — "  having  sugar  qualities  " — evidently  re- 
ferring to  the  honey  secretion  of  the  flower  buds. 
It  is  mentioned  in  the  works  of  a  number  of  early 
authors,  among  whom  are  Pliny,  Theophrastus, 
Dioscorides  and  Galen. 

Pliny,  in  his  Natural  Histoiy  (about  77  a.d.) 
gives  the  first  detailed  description  of  a  peony 
plant  and  seeds,  but  does  not  mention  the  flower. 
He  says : "  The  plant  known  as  paeonia  is  the  most 
ancient  of  them  all.  It  still  retains  the  name  of 
him  who  was  the  first  to  discover  it,  being  known 
also  as  the  '  pentorobus '    ( from  its  five  seeds 

4  Liddell  &  Scott,  Greek-English  Lexicon  (1888), 
p.  1106. 

3  33 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

which  resemble  vetches),  by  some  and  the  '  glu- 
cuside  '  by  others.  ...  It  grows  in  umbrageous 
mountain  localities  and  puts  forth  a  stem  amid 
the  leaves,  some  four  fingers  in  height,  at  the 
summit  of  which  are  four  or  five  heads  resembling 
Greek  nuts  in  appearance ;  enclosed  in  which  there 
is  a  considerable  quantity  of  seed  of  a  red  or  black 
colour.  This  plant  is  a  preservative  against  de- 
lusions practised  by  the  Fauni  in  sleep  (night- 
mare). .  .  ."5 

Pliny  devotes  one  chapter  to  a  fuller  de- 
scription of  the  plant  and  sets  out  twenty  ills  or 
diseases  of  the  human  body  which  it  will  cure. 
Among  these  are  jaundice,  gnawing  pains  in  the 
stomach  and  certain  affections  of  the  trachea.  He 
says  it  acts  as  an  astringent  and  then  adds:  "  It 
is  eaten  also  by  beasts  of  burden,  but  when  wanted 
for  remedial  purposes  four  drachmae  are 
sufficient."  6 

Dioscorides,  a  medical  man  who  flourished  in 
the  first  century  of  the  Christian  Era,  describes 
about  five  hundred  plants  in  his  Materia  Medica. 
The  peony  is  included  in  this  work.    The  famous 

5  Natural  History :  Book  XXV,  Ch.  10. 

6  Natural  History :  Book  XXV,  Ch.  60. 

31 


MYTHOLOGY,  AND  HISTORY  OF  THE  PEONY 

Viennese  Manuscript  of  Dioscorides,  painted  and 
written  in  Byzantium  for  the  Princess  Anicia 
Juliana  in  the  early  part  of  the  Sixth  Century, 
contains  a  number  of  brush  drawings  of  plants 
and  flowers,  some  of  which  closely  resemble  our 
specimens  of  to-day.  Unfortunately,  the  illus- 
trations of  the  two  peonies  mentioned  in  the  text 
— Pseonia  arren  [P.  corallina]  and  Peeonia  theleia 
[P.  officinalis]  are  missing.  The  lifelike  repre- 
sentation of  his  favourite  flower  was  evidently  too 
great  a  temptation  for  some  peony  lover  to  resist. 

Herbaceous  Peony  History 
in  china  and  japan 

In  China  and  Japan  the  popularity  of  the 
herbaceous  peony  was  somewhat  overshadowed 
by  that  of  the  tree  peony,  but  the  former  kind 
has  long  had  a  distinct  recognition  in  both  coun- 
tries. In  China  it  was  called  "  Sho  Yo  "  mean- 
ing "  most  beautiful,"  which  bespoke  a  consider- 
able appreciation  on  its  own  account,  even  though 
the  tree  peony  was  ranked  as  the  King  of  Flowers. 
It  served  as  a  sort  of  Forget-me-not  which  one 
friend  bestowed  upon  another  on  separation.  A 
Sho  Yo  plant  was  also  presented  for  a  friendly 

35 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

remembrance  after  separation.      These  customs 
are  referred  to  in  a  Chinese  song: 

"  If  anyone  will  give  his  friend  a  present 
He  hands  a  gift  '  most  beautiful '  of  all." 

In  536,  a.d.,  the  herbaceous  peony  was  fairly 
well  distributed  over  the  country  and  was  used 
for  medicinal  purposes  and  in  a  number  of  places 
even  for  food  for  human  beings.  The  apprecia- 
tion of  its  dietary  value  was  another  instance  of 
the  advanced  character  of  the  civilisation  of  China, 
for  the  peony  as  a  source  of  nourishment  was 
surely  but  the  prototype  of  some  of  our  modern 
breakfast  foods.  Hung  King  writing  at  this  time, 
distinguished  two  sorts,  the  red  and  the  white, 
which  is  the  first  mention  we  find  anywhere  of  a 
white  peony. 

In  968,  Mas  Ze,  an  author  on  natural  his- 
tory and  natural  philosophy,  discoursed  learnedly 
at  considerable  length  on  the  herbaceous  peony. 
In  the  early  part  of  the  Eleventh  Century,  ac- 
cording to  another  Chinese  historian  of  the  period, 
the  herbaceous  peony  was  grown  in  all  parts  of 
China  but  the  most  valuable  roots  came  from 
the  district  of  Huni  Gan  Foo — wherever  that  was. 


MYTHOLOGY,  AND  HISTORY  OF  THE  PEONY 

By  1086,  as  a  literary  botanist  of  that  date  tells 
us,  gardeners  realised  the  possibilities  of  the  plant 
for  ornamental  purposes  and  began,  by  the  ap- 
plication of  strong  fertilisers  and  great  diligence 
in  cultivation,  to  produce  flowers  of  large  size. 
As  a  result  of  these  efforts  and  the  extensive 
propagation  by  planting  of  seeds,  new  and  better 
varieties  were  produced.  In  1596,  more  than 
thirty  improved  kinds  were  listed  in  the  catalogues 
of  Chinese  growers. 

As  to  the  subsequent  history  in  China  not 
much  information  is  readily  accessible.  Loureiro 
in  1790  says  that  P.  officinalis  was  grown  over 
the  entire  Chinese  Empire,  but  principally  in  the 
northern  provinces,  and  that  it  had  been  imported 
to  Cochin  China.  In  the  middle  of  the  Nine- 
teenth Century,  a  number  of  valuable  peonies 
were  shipped  to  France  and  formed  the  founda- 
tion of  collections  made  by  noted  French  ama- 
teurs. At  the  present  time,  while  the  peony  is 
still  grown  extensively,  few  exportations  to 
Europe  or  this  country  are  made — due  possibly 
to  the  quality  of  Chinese  varieties  as  compared 
with  the  improved  varieties  of  this  side  of  the 

37 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 
world,  or  else  to  the  lack  of  initiative  of  the 
Chinese     in     distributing     their     horticultural 
products.7 

Among  the  number  of  beautiful  things  for 
which  Japan  is  indebted  to  China,  few  equal  the 
peony.  Early  in  the  Eighth  Century,  the  Japan- 
ese imported  from  China  both  the  herbaceous  and 
the  tree  peony.  The  herbaceous  peony  was  called 
"  Skakuyaku  " — apparently  a  corruption  of  the 
Chinese  Sho  Yo — and  has  been  highly  thought 
of,  although  not  accorded  the  honours  given  the 
tree  peony,  which  is  ranked  as  one  of  the  three 
Royal  Flowers. 

In  Japanese  literature  and  folklore  the  peony 
is  the  subject  of  many  poems  and  stories.  It  is 
not  clear  in  each  case  from  the  translation  whether 
the  herbaceous  or  the  tree  peony  is  referred  to, 
but  it  is  evident  that  both  kinds  were  cherished 
in  the  hearts  of  this  flower-loving  people.  There 
is  a  little  Japanese  verse  that  shows  that  East 

7  At  the  present  time  (1916)  inasmuch  as  the 
Chinese  Government  has  not  complied  with  the  regula- 
tions of  the  United  States  Department  of  Agriculture 
as  to  inspection,  peonies  cannot  be  imported  from  China 
to  this  country. 


MARIE  JACQUIN 

(Verdier) 

Semi-double  type.     A  glossy  white  peony  frequently  called  "Water  Lily" 


MYTHOLOGY,  AND  HISTORY  OF  THE  PEONY 
and  West  meet  in  the  kindred  pleasures  of  the 
garden  if  nowhere  else: 

"  When  Spring  is  on  the  wane, 
Then  men  are  apt 
To  turn  their  thoughts 
To  peonies  again." 

At  the  present  time,  there  are  several  nurseries 
in  Japan  which  grow  both  herbaceous  and  tree 
peonies.  One  of  these,  which  does  a  large  export 
business  to  England  and  America,  maintains 
an  office  in  each  country.  Twenty-nine  varieties 
of  the  herbaceous  peony  are  listed  in  the  catalogue 
of  this  nursery,  the  names  of  some  of  which  are 
delightfully  quaint.  Someganoko — painted  fawn, 
Shishi-Odori — dancing  lions,  Kame-no-Kegor- 
omo — turtle's  holiday  attire,  are  among  the  most 
diverting.  The  present  exportations  from  Japan 
of  herbaceous  peonies  consist  principally  of  a 
form  of  peonies  of  a  distinct  type  known  as  the 
Japanese,  which  constitutes  a  separate  class  in- 
termediate between  the  single  and  double  types. 

IN   ENGLAND 

The  knowledge  of  flowers  and  plants  in  Saxon 
times  (about  477-1017)  and  for  several  subse- 
quent centuries,  was  chiefly  based  on  the  works 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

of  Pliny  and  Dioscorides.  These  two  authors 
were  largely  drawn  on  by  Apuleius,  who  lived 
about  150  a.d.  His  Herbarius,  written  in  Latin, 
was  later  translated  into  Anglo-Saxon,  and  must 
have  been  one  of  the  horticultural  "  best  sellers  " 
of  the  day,  as  there  are  no  less  than  four  MSS. 
extant. 

Alexander  Necham,  born  in  1157,  was  an  early 
English  writer  on  gardening.  After  some  years 
spent  as  a  student  and  professor  in  Paris,  he  be- 
came the  abbot  of  the  Augustine  monks  at  Ciren- 
cester. In  those  days  monasteries  had  gardens 
of  considerable  size  and  the  monks  "  went  in  heav- 
ily "  for  raising  herbs,  vegetables  and  flowers.  In 
Necham's  De  Naturis  Rerum,  he  gives  a  descrip- 
tion of  what  a  "  noble  garden  "  should  contain. 
"  The  garden,"  he  writes,  "  should  be  adorned  with 
roses  and  lillies,  turnsole,  violets  and  mandrake; 
there  you  should  have  .  .  .  fennel,  coriander 
.  .  .  and  peonies."  It  would  seem  that  all  these 
plants  were  cultivated  in  typical  gardens  of  the 
time.  The  peony  of  this  date  was  in  all  proba- 
bility P.  officinalis. 

In  the  Fourteenth  Century  peonies  were  used 
for  seasoning.     In  Langland's  Vision  of  Piers 

40 


PIONIA 

CPionia  calida  &  ficea  in  fecundo  gradu.  Cuius  rax 
dixinmedicinisponicurcum  reperftur  in  receptis 
eligenda  eft  ilia  quae  nigra  exiitit  continua  non  per 
forata*&  in  hyeme  colligitur  8C  per  annum  fcruatf* 
Virtutem  habet  occultam  contra  epilentiam  &  fu/ 
fpenfam  collo  pracferuat  ab  epilentia:teftante  Galic 
no  experto  de  quoda5  puero  cuius  collo  talis  radix 
appefa  erat  &  non  patiebat?:radice,n,fubtratfa  (la/ 

PAGE  FROM  HERBARIUS  OF  ARNOLDUS  DE  VILLANOVA,  PUBLISHED  IN   1484 
This  is  the  first  known  printed  picture  of  the  peony 


MYTHOLOGY,  AND  HISTORY  OF  THE  PEONY 

Plowman — a  popular  allegorical  poem,  written 
about  1375 — a  priest  asks  a  poor  woman: 

"  '  Hast  thou  ought  in  thy  purs',  quod  he 
*  Any  hote  spices?  ' 
*I  have  peper  and  piones'  (peonies)  quod 

she,'  and  a  pounde  garlike, 
'  A  ferthyngworth  of  fenel  seed,  for  fastyng 
dayes.'  " 

In  another  poem  of  the  same  century,  entitled 
"  The  Pearl,"  the  flowers  around  an  arbour  are 
described : 

"  I  entered  in  that  arber  grene 
In  augeoste  in  a  high  seysoun 
****** 

Shadowed  this  wortes  ful  schyre  (bright) 

and  schere 
Gilofre  (clove-pinks)   gingure   (tansy)   and 

groomylyon  (gromwell) 
And  pyonys  powdered  ay  betwene." 

It  thus  appears  that  at  this  early  day  the  use 
of  the  peony  in  the  hardy  border  had  begun. 

In  1484,  about  300  years  after  Necham,  the 
Herbarius  credited  to  Arnoldus  de  Villanova  was 
published  on  the  Continent.  This  book  contains 
probably  the  first  printed  picture  of  the  peony — 
a  wood-cut  in  which  flowers,  leaves  and  roots  are 

41 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

completely  conventionalised  (see  illustration, 
page  40).  In  addition  to  its  historical  interest, 
the  quaint  stiffness  of  the  wood-cut  has  a  charm 
of  its  own.  The  text,  which  is  in  terrific  mediaeval 
Latin,  is  mainly  devoted  to  the  use  of  the  peony 
for  medical  purposes,  and  is  based  on  Galen. 
Later  English  writers  made  use  of  this  work 
freely. 

In  Tudor  times  (1485-1603),  contemporary 
authors  mention  peonies  together  with  other  old 
favourites — jasmine,  lavender,  lilies,  rosemary, 
rocket  and  snapdragon — as  being  grown  in  the 
knottes  or  beds  that  were  then  coming  into  fashion. 

The  many  names  under  which  the  peony  was 
known  in  England  indicate  that  the  flower  was 
widely  grown  and  was  regarded  with  affection. 
Some  of  these  names  were:  chesses,  hundred- 
bladed  rose,  marmaritin,  piny,  pie  nanny,  nan  pie, 
pianet,  piano  rose,  posy,  sheep  shearing  rose,  rose 
royale. 

In  1579,  John  Gerard,  a  physician  and  prac- 
tical gardener  of  Holloway,  near  London,  pub- 
lished his  Herbal.  In  this  book,  which  was 
founded  on  A  History  of  Plants  by  Dodoens,  a 
Hollander   (1554),  four  pages  are  devoted  to 

42 


HISTORIE   OF    PLANTS.  831 

4     There  is  fount!  another  fort  of  the  double  Pcionic  not  differing  from  the  precedent  in  fhlkes, 
IcaueSjOr  rootes :  this  plant  bringeth  foorth  white  flowers  wherein  confifteth  the  difference. 


3  P*on;a farmina multipkx. 
Double  red  Peionie. 


4  Titonin  f ambit  folytnthosflore  Alba, 
The  double  white  Peionie. 


•xThcdtfcription. 

ThcreisanotherkindeofPeionie(calIedofD^^;a/>^^/^;M^^,butof^4^^ 
grM^jiMMMinEngkfli  Maiden  or  Virg.nePeionie)  thatislikcvntothccommonfcnwte 
Peiomc/a.nng .that h,s  leaues  and  flowers  arc  much  fmaller ,  and  the  (hikes  (hotter ,  and  beaieth 
red  flowers.and  feede  alio  like  the  former.  '      uuc,uccn 

We  haue  likcwife  in  our  London  gardens  another  fort  bearing  flowers  of  a  pale  whitifh  colour 
very  fingle5refemblmg  the  female  w.lde  Peio„ie,in  other  refpedtslike  thcdoubLhitcPctonfe 

an  u  *  The  place. 

They  flower  in  May.the  feede  is  ripe  in  Inly. 

mendocalU^^olLun;dcbk  tt*^ffi^*^^fl°fo 

c,ui<.u  ia*m  Dtiijltt,  •  which  agreeth  with  the  female 
Peionie, 


PAGE   FROM  GERARD'S   HERBAL,   PUBLISHED   IN  ENGLAND   IN   1597 

The  botanical  names  are  somewhat  primitive  and  are  no  longer  used.     "Female  Peony"  was  a 
name  for  P.  officinalis.      "Male  Peony"  was  a  name  for  P.  corallina 


MYTHOLOGY,  AND  HISTORY  OF  THE  PEONY 

peonies  and  eight  illustrations  are  given.  The 
text  and  pictures  are  so  engaging  that  I  have 
reproduced  one  of  the  pages  (see  illustration, 
page  42).  Gerard  speaks  of  the  medicinal  vir- 
tues of  peonies:  "  The  black  graines  (the  seeds)  to 
the  number  of  fifteen  take  in  wine  or  mead.  .  .  . 
is  a  special  remedy  for  those  that  are  troubled  in 
the  night  with  the  disease  known  as  Ephialtes 
or  night  mare  which  is  as  though  a  heavy  burthen 
were  laid  upon  them,  and  they  oppressed  there- 
with, as  if  they  were  overcome  by  their  enemies 
or  overprest  with  some  great  weight;  and  they 
are  also  good  against  melancholick  dreams." 

In  "The  Taming  of  the  Shrew"  (1603), 
Shakespeare  refers  to  peonies  in  the  line :  "  Thy 
banks  with  peonied  and  lilied  brims." 

In  1629,  John  Parkinson,  King's  herbarist, 
apothecary  and  traveller,  who  possessed  an  ex- 
cellent garden  near  London,  published  his  "  Par- 
adisi  in  Sole,  Paradisus  Terrestris  "  (a  play  on 
his  name,  Park-in-Sun's  Earthly  Paradise)  "  or 
a  Choice  Garden  of  all  sorts  of  Rarest  Flowers 
with  their  Nature,  place  of  Birth,  time  of  flower- 
ing, Names  of  Vertues  to  each  plant,  useful  in 
Physick  or  Admired  for  Beauty."    In  this  book, 

43 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

after  describing  six  kinds  of  peonies — two!  of 
which  were  double — Parkinson  says,  "  All  these 
Peonies  have  been  sent  or  brought  from  divers 
parts  beyond  the  Seas;  they  are  endenizened  in 
our  gardens  where  we  cherish  them  for  the  beauty 
and  delight  of  their  goodly  flowers  as  well  as 
for  their  physical  vertues."  Of  the  two  double 
peonies  described  by  Parkinson,  one  was  white 
and  one  red.  It  has  been  suggested  that  the 
double  white  had  originated  as  a  sport  of  the 
double  red. 

The  first  Botanical  Garden  in  England  was 
established  at  Oxford  by  the  Earl  of  Danby,  about 
1621  "  for  a  nursery  for  simples."  In  this  gar- 
den, as  appears  by  the  catalogue,  there  were 
"  double  and  single  Peony  "  in  company  with 
twenty  kinds  of  roses,  including  York  and  Lan- 
caster. In  the  History  of  Plants  at  Oxford  by 
Robert  Morrison  (1620-1683),  who  was  noted 
for  being  one  of  the  pioneers  in  the  systematic 
botanical  classification  of  plants,  there  is  a  de- 
scription of  several  peonies  including  a  flesh- 
coloured  peony. 

In  the  well-known  Botanists'  and  Gardeners' 

44 


MYTHOLOGY,  AND  HISTORY  OF  THE  PEONY 

Directory  of  Philip  Miller,  Keeper  of  the  Chel- 
sea Botanic  Garden  of  the  Worshipful  Company 
of  Apothecaries,  which  work  first  appeared  in 
1731,  seven  kinds  of  peonies  are  set  out  as  all  the 
sorts  the  author  had  observed  in  English  gardens. 
The  seven  are  two  varieties  of  corallina  (both 
single),  officinalis  (single,  large  double  and  small 
double),  a  double  white  and  Lusitanica  or  Por- 
tugal peony.  Of  the  last  variety  Miller  says: 
"  The  Flowers  of  this  kind  are  single,  but  do 
smell  very  sweet  which  renders  it  worthy  of  a 
Place  in  every  good  Garden."  It  is  difficult  to 
identify  this  variety  with  certainty  at  the  present 
time  although  it  is  probably  Broteri. 

During  the  latter  half  of  the  Eighteenth  Cen- 
tury several  additional  kinds,  including  tenuif olia, 
peregrina  and  anomala,  were  cultivated  in 
England. 

In  the  early  part  of  the  Nineteenth  Century 
some  varieties  of  albiflora  were  imported  from 
China  that  are  still  offered  by  growers.  Among 
these  are  Fragrans  (Sir  Joseph  Banks,  1805), 
Whitleyi  (Whitley,  1808) — which  the  importer 
had  been  led  to  believe  was  a  yellow  tree  peony — 
and  Humei  (Anderson,  1810).      Fragrans  was 

45 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

the  earliest  sweet  scented  double  variety  grown 
in  England. 

In  1837,  the  variety  Pottsii  was  described  as 
the  most  splendid  of  the  five  albifloras  cultivated 
in  English  gardens.  It  had  been  introduced  from 
China  by  John  Potts — an  intrepid  plant-collector 
— in  1822,  and  named  after  him. 

The  first  large  collection  of  named  peonies  in 
England  was  made  by  Loddige  in  Hackney  in 
1845,  and  was  sold  eight  years  later.  In  1850, 
Salter,  a  nurseryman,  began  a  collection  with  the 
albifloras,  Edulis  superba  (splendid,  with  edible 
roots),  originated  by  Lemon  in  France  in  1824, 
Pottsii  and  Reevesii,  and  some  other  varieties 
imported  from  Belgium.  In  his  catalogue,  of 
1855,  twenty- four  double  sorts  are  listed.  At 
this  time,  peonies  began  to  have  such  a  large 
sale  that  Salter  was  unable  to  supply  the  demand 
for  P.  Grandiflora  nivea  plena  (double  large 
snow  white) — originated  by  Lemon  in  1824 — 
P.  lutea  plenissima  (very  double,  yellow)  — 
originated  by  Buyck  in  Belgium  in  1842 — and 
several  of  the  others  that  he  offered. 

In  addition  to  the  above-named  varieties,  the 
first  hybridisers  in  England  had  three  forms  of 

46 


SOUVENIR  DE  L'EXPOSITION   UNIVERSELLE 

(Calot,  1SG7) 
Rose  type.     Large  flat  flowers  of  rich  deep  pink.     Brilliant  and  free-blooming  variety 


MYTHOLOGY,  AND  HISTORY  OF  THE  PEONY 

P.  officinalis — rubra  (red — the  common  double 
red),  rosea  (rose)  and  carnescens  plena  (double 
flesh  white) — with  which  to  make  a  beginning. 

In  1864,  James  Kelway,  of  Somersetshire, 
made  his  first  attempt  in  improving  existing  types. 
He  commenced  in  a  modest  way  with  P.  officinalis 
and  P.  corallina,  but  soon  went  into  the  growing 
of  peonies  on  a  very  extensive  scale.  Twenty 
years  later  he  catalogued  two  hundred  and  fifty 
varieties  of  which  sixty-three  were  new  single 
and  forty-one  new  double  varieties  of  his  own 
raising.  Through  his  energy  in  introducing  and 
distributing  improved  forms  Kelway  did  much 
to  make  the  peony  popular  in  England.  Among 
his  best  productions  are  Baroness  Schroeder 
(1889),  Miss  Salway  (1905)  and  Kelway's 
Glorious  (1909). 

Peter  Barr  was  a  tireless  collector  of  all 
species  of  the  peony  and  was  also  much  inter- 
ested in  hybridising.  From  his  establishment 
have  come  Wittmaniana  rosea,  one  of  the  Witt- 
maniana  hybrids,  and  the  albifloras,  Helena  Les- 
lie, Lord  Rosebery  and  Celestine. 

In  1885,  a  First  Class  Certificate  of  the  Royal 
Horticultural  Society  was  granted  to  a  peony 

47 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

named  Snowflake — the  first  peony  to  receive  this 
honour. 

About  1890,  after  a  period  of  many  years, 
during  which  exotics  and  bedding  plants  were  in 
great  demand,  the  newer  and  better  varieties  of 
peony  brought  that  flower  into  prominence  again. 
The  successful  work  of  French  growers  who  de- 
voted much  time  to  hybridising  the  peony  was 
largely  responsible  for  the  revival  of  its  fashion. 
Since  then  the  peony  has  gone  forward  rapidly 
both  in  improvement  and  popularity. 

At  the  Royal  Gardens  at  Kew  and  Glasnevin 
and  at  Chiswick,  there  are  large  collections  of 
peonies  for  the  enjoyment  and  education  of  the 
public.  At  the  Royal  Horticultural  Society's 
Gardens  at  Wisley,  a  comparative  trial,  held 
about  1896,  is  now  (1916)  being  repeated  with 
the  newest  forms  raised  since  then.  The  reports 
will  be  published  in  the  Journal  of  the  Society, 

IN   FKANCE 

The  history  of  the  peony  in  England  is  chiefly 
the  history  of  its  cultivation  in  gardens  from  the 
earliest  time.  In  France  the  record  of  the  im- 
provement of  the  individual  flower  in  recent  years 


MYTHOLOGY,  AND  HISTORY  OP  THE  PEONY 

is  the  main  thing  that  has  come  down  to  us. 
There  is  an  account  of  one  famous  peony,  P. 
daurica  (brought  from  Siberia  via  England), 
which  was  introduced  about  1810  as  a  rare  plant 
at  Malmaison  for  the  Empress  Josephine.8 

France  has  given  the  world  the  most  numer- 
ous and  famous  growers  and  hybridisers  of  the 
peony,  whose  efforts  during  the  past  century 
produced  many  of  the  finest  varieties  we  see  in 
the  best  collections  at  the  present  time.  The  work 
of  improving  the  peony  was  begun  earlier  in 
France  than  in  England  and  soon  became  of 
great  interest  to  royal  and  aristocratic  connois- 
seurs. Among  the  varieties  we  have  to-day  were 
some  originated  between  1830  and  1848  in  the 
garden  of  King  Louis  Philippe  at  Neuilly  under 
the  care  of  his  gardener,  M.  Jacques. 

Before  this,  probably  the  first  man  in  Europe 
to  raise  peonies  from  seeds  and  to  offer  the  best 
of  these  as  named  sorts  was  M.  Lemon  of  the 
Porte  St.  Denis,  Paris.     As  far  back  as  1824 

8  For  a  full  account  of  this  peony  see  Description 
des  Plantes  Rares  Cultivees  a  Malmaison  et  Navarre. 
A.  Bonpland,  Paris,  1813.     This  species  is  also  known 
as  P.  corallina,  var.  triternata. 
4  49 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

(about  the  time  when  hybrid  perpetual  roses 
began  to  be  popular) ,  he  raised  a  lot  of  seedlings 
of  P.  officinalis  from  which  came  P.  anemoniflora 
alba  and  P.  grandiflora  nivea  plena.  The  last 
named  of  these — white,  shaded  with  salmon, — 
though  one  of  the  oldest  hybrids,  even  now  ranks 
among  the  best.  In  the  same  year,  P.  edulis 
superba — a  peony  still  much  grown — was  also 
produced  by  Lemon.  In  1830,  he  originated  P. 
sulphurea — white,  tinted  yellowish  green — a  kind 
sufficiently  attractive  to  be  cultivated  to-day. 
Lemon  achieved  not  only  greatly  desired  modi- 
fications in  colour  and  form,  but  also  a  pleasing 
fragrance  which  exists  in  most  of  his  varieties 
and  is  very  marked  in  some  of  them. 

Modeste  Guerin,  starting  in  1835,  in  Paris, 
with  plants  brought  from  China  and  Japan,  made 
rapid  advances  in  improving  the  peony.  From 
then  until  1866,  he  introduced  more  than  forty 
new  varieties:  among  them  General  Bertrand 
(1845),  Modeste  Guerin  (1845),  Duchesse  d'Or- 
leans  (1846),  Dr.  Bretonneau  ( 1 850 ) ,  Madame  de 
Vatry  (1853)  and  Alexandre  Dumas  (1862),  are 
conspicuous  for  their  excellence.  It  is  interesting 
to  note  that  Guerin  succeeded  in  getting  in  sev- 

50 


Crown  type. 


DUCHESSE  DE  NEMOURS 
(Calot,  1856) 

This  lovely  cup-shaped  bud  is  of  a  greenish  tint,  which  fades  to  pure  white  as  the 
flower  develops 


MYTHOLOGY,  AND  HISTORY  OF  THE  PEONY 

eral  of  his  peonies  a  touch  of  yellow,  which  up 
to  this  time  was  almost  an  unknown  colour  in 
this  flower.    Some  of  his  varieties  that  had  yellow 
in  them  were  put  out  before  the  first  yellow  peony 
—P.  Wittmaniana— was  discovered.     Three  in- 
stances of  what  he  accomplished  in  this  regard  are 
Grandiflora  lutescens   (1840),  with  fleshy  white 
guard  petals  and  a  yellow  centre,  Reine  des  Fran- 
ces  (1842),  with  fleshy  pink  guard  petals  and 
white  centre  shaded  yellow,  and  Triomphe  de 
Paris  (1850),  white  with  yellowish  centre.  Guerin 
also   produced   some  red   peonies— chiefly  with 
magenta  tints— which  owed  their  dark  colour  to 
P.  Pottsii. 

By  1840,  the  Prince  de  Salm  Dyck,  an  ama- 
teur horticulturist  who  was  a  native  of  Cologne 
but  who  resided  for  many  years  in  Paris,  had 
imported  a  number  of  valuable  plants  direct  from 
the  Orient.  These  apparently  passed  to  the 
House  of  Solange  Bodin  near  Paris.  From  1845 
on,  some  fine  new  double  varieties  were  sent  out 
by  this  establishment:  none  of  these,  however,  are 
capable  of  identification  at  the  present  time. 

The  collection  raised  by  M.  Jacques  was  in- 
herited by  his  nephew,  M.  Victor  Verdier,  pre- 


51 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

sumably  after  the  revolution  of  1848  and  the  de- 
thronement of  Louis  Philippe.  Verdier  had  pro- 
duced some  new  varieties  prior  to  this  date,  but 
sixteen  of  his  best  kinds — still  offered  by  growers 
to-day — were  put  out  between  1855  and  1861. 
One  of  Verdier's  most  noted  peonies  is  the  incom- 
parable Marie  Jacquin. 

Comte  de  Cussy  was  an  enthusiastic  amateur 
who  started  with  importations  from  China  and 
raised  from  them  a  number  of  distinctive  varieties. 
It  was  from  his  large  collection  in  other  hands 
that  a  very  high  development  of  the  peony  was 
subsequently  reached.  About  1850,  M.  Calot,  of 
Douai,  acquired  the  collection  of  the  Comte. 
From  then  until  1872,  with  rare  imagination  and 
diligence  he  originated  over  twenty  new  kinds, 
many  of  which  are  greatly  prized  in  gardens  now. 
Among  them  are  Philomele   (1861),  Solfatare 

(1861) — until  the  introduction  of  Primevere,  the 
nearest  approach  in  a  hybrid  to  a  yellow  peony ; 
the  exquisite  Duchesse  de  Nemours  (1856), 
Madame    Lemonier    (1860),    Eugenie    Verdier 

(1864),  Madame  Crousse  ( 1 866 ) ,  Couronne  d'Or 

(1872),  La  Tulipe    (1872),  Monsieur  Dupont 

(1872). 

52 


MYTHOLOGY,  AND  HISTORY  OF  THE  PEONY 

In  1872  the  collection  of  J.  Calot  passed  into 
the  hands  of  M.  Crousse,  of  Nancy,  who  con- 
tinued to  send  out  selections  from  the  Calot  seed- 
lings until  1879  and  who  later,  from  1882  to  1898, 
introduced  a  large  number  (over  seventy-five)  of 
seedlings  of  his  own.  Under  Crousse  the  peony 
was  bred  up  to  such  a  point  that  it  seems  almost 
impossible  to  improve  upon  his  work.  The  name 
Crousse  attached  to  any  peony  can  always  be 
taken  as  indicating  merit.  Among  the  vari- 
eties of  Crousse  are:  Modele  de  Perfection 
(1875),  Livingston  (1879),  Madame  Emile 
Galle  (1881),  Felix  Crousse  (1881),  Madame  de 
Galhau  (1883),  Madame  de  Verneville  (1885), 
Avalanche  (1886),  Asa  Gray  (1886)  Made- 
moiselle Rousseau  (1888),  Monsieur  Jules  Elie 
(1888),  Marguerite  Gerard  (1892). 

Contemporary  with  Guerin,  Verdier,  Calot 
and  Crousse  was  Etienne  Mechin,  an  ardent  ama- 
teur who,  tutored  by  the  celebrated  horticulturist, 
Bretonneau,  began  to  collect  peonies  as  early  as 
1840.  By  1860,  he  had  acquired  a  famous  col- 
lection comprising  importations  from  China  and 
Japan,  and  seedlings  of  his  own  raising.  Madame 
Ducel  (1880)  and  Raphael  (1882)— a  valuable 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

early  red — are  two  of  his  best  products.  With 
his  grandson,  Auguste  Dessert,  Mechin  put  out 
a  number  of  new  sorts  among  which  were  Adolphe 
Rousseau  (1890)  and  Suzanne  Dessert  (1890). 
Mechin  was  succeeded  by  Dessert  who  has  added 
many  noteworthy  varieties  and  is  still  actively  en- 
gaged in  this  work  at  Chanonceaux.  Dessert  is 
considered  one  of  the  greatest  living  experts  on 
peonies.  He  has  produced  Madame  D.  Treyeran 
(1889),  Marcelle  Dessert  (1899),  Monsieur 
Martin  Cahuzac  (1899),  Germaine  Bigot 
(1902),  Aurore  (1904).  The  Mechin-Dessert 
group  is  one  of  the  most  important  in  the  history 
of  the  peony  in  France. 

Within  the  past  twenty  years,  Victor  Lemoine 
of  Nancy,  who  occupies  the  old  establishment  of 
Crousse,9  has  become  one  of  the  world's  greatest 

9  Tabulation  showing  successive  owners  of  noted 
French  collections  of  peonies: 

1.  Etienne  Mechin  (1815-1895) 

collection  started  1840 
Dessert  and  Mechin,  1882-1893 
Auguste  Dessert,  1888- 

now  extant  at  Chanonceaux. 

2.  Comte  de  Cussy 
Calot,  1850-1872 

54 


AURORE 
(Dessert,  1904) 

Semi-rose  type.     An  exquisite  peony  of  delicate  pale  pink  with  prominent  golden  stamens. 
Excellent  for  cutting 


mythology,  and  history  of  the  peony 

hybridisers  in  peonies  as  well  as  in  other  plants. 
His  varieties — the  most  recent  of  the  French  in- 
troductions— are  notable  for  their  distinction  of 
form  and  colouring  in  addition  to  their  rare 
beauty.  Among  the  best  of  his  productions  are 
La  Fiancee  (1898),  Madame  Emile  Lemoine 
(1899),  Alsace-Lorraine  (1906),  Sarah  Bern- 
hardt (1906),  Le  Cygne  (1907),  Primevere 
(1907),  Lamartine  (1908). 

Other  names  closely  identified  with  the  devel- 
opment of  the  peony  in  France  are  Miellez  (who 
originated  Festiva  Maxima  [1851]),  Pele,  De- 
lache,  Gombault,  Foulard,  Seneclauze,  Paillet, 
Millet,  Brochet  and  Croux. 

Crousse,  1875-1898 
Victor  Lemoine,  1898- 
now  extant  at  Nancy. 

3.  M.  Jacques,  gardener  to  Louis  Philippe,  1830-1848 
Victor  Verdier,  1848-1866. 

Eugene  Verdier,  1866- ? 

Part  of  this  collection  was  acquired  by  Dessert. 

4.  Modeste  Guerin,  1835-1866 

A  large  part  of  this  collection  was  bought  by 
Mechin.  The  ground  in  Paris  occupied  by  this 
collection  and  by  that  of  Eugene  Verdier  was 
sold  for  building  purposes,  and  the  collections 
were  dispersed. 

55 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

IN    AMERICA 

The  fact  that  the  peony  does  not  appear  in 
horticultural  literature  in  this  country  before  1800 
may  be  accounted  for  more  by  the  absence  of  the 
literature  than  the  absence  of  the  peony.  Not 
till  the  beginning  of  the  Nineteenth  Century  did 
horticulture  as  distinct  from  agriculture  attain 
some  individuality.  The  literature  arose  with 
the  art. 

Bernard  McMahon  in  his  American  Garden- 
ers' Chronicle — an  ambitious  work  published  in 
1806 — gives  a  list  of  perennials  suited  to  the  open 
ground  in  the  Middle  and  Eastern  States.  He 
includes  five  kinds  of  peonies:  "P.  officinalis: 
common  peony;  albiflora:  white  flowered  peony; 
laciniata:  jagged-leaved  peony;  hybrida:  mule 
peony,  and  tenuifolia:  slender-leaved  peony." 
Presumably  all  these  existed  in  America  when 
the  book  was  printed,  although  it  has  been  cruelly 
suggested  by  one  critic  that  McMahon's  lists 
were  compiled  from  English  sources. 

As  might  be  expected,  the  peony  appears  in 
the  Catalogue  of  John  Bartram  &  Son  of  their 
"  Foreign  Plants  Collected  from  Various  Parts 
of  the  Globe  "  and  cultivated  at  their  Botanic 

56 


MYTHOLOGY,  AND  HISTORY  OF  THE  PEONY 

Garden  at  Kingsessing,  near  Philadelphia 
(1807).  The  reference,  as  in  all  cases  in  the 
catalogue,  is  merely  the  name — "  Pseonia  officin- 
alis " — without  description  or  comment.  In  the 
Catalogue  of  Bartram's  Garden  published  in 
1828  (five  years  after  John  Bartram's  death), 
we  find  six  herbaceous  peonies  in  addition  to 
some  tree  peonies: 

"Paeonia  officinalis crimson  officinal  p«ony  .25 

"         albicans double  white  "        .25 

r°sea rose  coloured  "        .25 

"         rubra double  red  "        .25 

"         carnescens flesh  coloured  "     1.00 

albiflora simplex,  .single  white  "      1.00" 

In  Green's  Treatise  on  Ornamental  Flowers, 
published  in  Boston  in  1828,  peonies  are  included 
among  the  "  leading  plants  "  of  the  day.  And 
in  the  same  year  there  is  a  record  of  the  elder 
Thomas  Hogg  exhibiting  a  single  white  P.  offi- 
cinalis at  an  exhibition  of  the  New  York  Hor- 
ticultural Society. 

William  Prince,  of  Flushing,  Long  Island,  in 
1829,  in  his  annual  Catalog  of  Trees  and  Plants 
cultivated  at  his  famous  Linngean  Botanic  Gar- 
den, says:  "  No  class  of  flowers  has  recently  at- 

57 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

tracted  more  attention  in  Europe  than  the  peonies. 
...  Most  of  the  varieties  are  extremely  splendid 
and  others  possess  striking  peculiarities.  Antici- 
pating that  a  similar  taste  would  be  evinced  in 
this  country,  the  proprietor  has,  by  a  great  exer- 
tion, obtained  every  variety  possible  from  Europe 
and  also  a  number  from  China."  He  lists  forty 
kinds  containing  a  great  diversity  of  shades  and 
colours.  The  prices  range  from  fifty  cents  to 
twenty  dollars,  but  most  of  the  plants  are  quoted 
under  two  dollars. 

An  elaborate  botanical  work  published  in 
1846-1850— The  American  Flora,  by  Dr.  A.  B. 
Strong — contains  coloured  plates  and  descrip- 
tions of  P.  officinalis,  P.  peregrina,  P.  edulis 
Reevesiana  and  P.  Russi,  all  of  varying  degrees 
of  red  and  magenta.  I  say  "  of  varying  degrees  " 
advisedly:  the  plates  were  coloured  by  hand  and 
I  am  credibly  informed  no  two  of  them  were 
alike ! 

The  introduction  of  a  number  of  varieties  of 
the  species  of  P.  albiflora,  which  occurred  about 
1850,  caused  an  increase  in  the  popularity  of  the 
peony  in  this  country.  The  merits  of  this  type — 
fragrance,  great  hardiness,  erect  habit  of  growth, 

58 


STEPHANIA 
(Terry,  1891) 

Semi-double  type.    A  cup-shaped  peony  of  deep  cream.     The  reflections  from  golden  stamens  intensify 
the  colour  and  light  up  the  flower 


MYTHOLOGY,  AND  HISTORY  OF  THE  PEONY 

variability  as  to  colour  and  form  of  flowers — all 
combined  to  create  a  demand  for  this  new 
"  Chinese  peony,"  the  name  by  which  it  began  to 
be  called.  As  reproduction  by  division  of  the 
roots  was  extremely  slow  on  account  of  the  limited 
quantity  of  the  several  kinds,  propagation  by 
seeds  was  resorted  to.  Cross  pollination,  either 
accidental  or  directed  by  hybridisers,  in  time  gave 
rise  to  scores  of  novel  forms  of  flowers. 

In  1858,  H.  A.  Terry  of  Crescent,  Iowa,  one 
of  the  pioneers  among  peony  experts  of  this  coun- 
try, obtained  from  William  Robert  Prince,  who 
had  inherited  the  Linnaean  Botanic  Garden,  at 
Flushing,  thirty  varieties  of  P.  albiflora,  includ- 
ing Humei,  Pottsii,  Reevesii,  Comte  de  Paris, 
fragrans,  festiva  maxima,  lutetiana,  edulis  su- 
perba,  plenissima  rosea  and  Queen  Victoria. 
Many  of  these  freely  produced  seeds  from  which 
Terry  soon  had  thousands  of  seedlings  growing. 
He  selected  the  best  for  further  propagation  but 
found  that  generally  not  five — often  not  one — 
in  a  thousand  were  worth  cultivating.  During  a 
long  life  time — longevity  and  peony  growing 
seem  to  go  hand  in  hand — Terry  produced  over 
a  hundred  new  varieties  among  which  are  a  few 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 
very  beautiful  ones — Stephania  (note  colour 
plate) ,  Grover  Cleveland,  dark  crimson,  and  Mrs. 
McKinley  (note  colour  plate).  Shortly  before 
his  death,  Terry  sold  most  of  his  collection  for 
twenty-five  hundred  dollars. 

John  Richardson,  an  enthusiastic  lover  of  or- 
namental plants,  raised  in  his  small  garden  in 
Dorchester,  Massachusetts,  a  number  of  impor- 
tant new  varieties  of  peony.  Some  fragrant 
flowers  of  his  growing  are  noted  as  far  back  as 
1857,  about  thirty  years  after  the  first  fragrant 
peonies  were  produced  in  France.  From  that 
year  until  his  death  in  1887  he  was  actively  en- 
gaged in  growing  seedlings.  He  had  only  a  few 
mature  plants — some  forty  albiflora  peonies — but 
in  addition  he  carefully  tended  their  descendants, 
"  candidates  for  fame  "  as  he  called  them.  He 
originated  about  eighteen  double  varieties  distin- 
guished by  their  fine  form,  colour,  vigorous  up- 
right habit,  large  size  and  uniformly  high  quality. 
Many  of  them  were  awarded  certificates  of  merit 
by  the  Massachusetts  Horticultural  Society.  The 
chief  stock  from  which  his  seedlings  came  prob- 
ably was:   Festiva  Maxima,  Festiva  and  Pottsii 

60 


MYTHOLOGY,  AND  HISTORY  OF  THE  PEONY 

plena,  and  a  double  white  seedling  originated  by 
Mr.  Carter  of  the  Harvard  Botanic  Garden. 

A  good  example  of  Richardson's  work  is 
Walton  Faxon,  conspicuous  for  its  pure  and  beau- 
tiful rose-colour.  Others  are  Milton  Hill,  another 
of  the  finest  pink  peonies,  Perfection,  Dorchester, 
Charles  Sedgwick  Minot  and  Grandiflora.  Most 
of  his  varieties  are  light  in  colour  and  late  flower- 
ing. Richardson's  seedlings  were  not  offered  for 
sale  until  after  his  death,  at  which  time  all  of 
his  productions  were  named  by  his  friends,  John 
C.  Hovey  and  Prof.  Robert  Tracy  Jackson,  of 
Cambridge,  Massachusetts. 

Richardson's  success  in  producing  new  vari- 
eties of  great  worth  and  beauty  is  an  inspiration. 
He  showed  how  even  a  small  garden  may  prove 
large  enough  to  bring  enduring  fame  to  its  de- 
voted owner. 

George  Hollis,  of  South  Weymouth,  Massa- 
chusetts, during  the  "  nineties  "  originated  about 
one  hundred  new  varieties.  All  of  his  produc- 
tions are  very  scarce  and  many  high-priced  at  the 
present  time.  Among  the  best  are  Standard 
Bearer  (1906),  Adelaide  E.  Hollis  (1907), 
George  Hollis   (1907),  Loveliness    (1907)    and 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

Maud  L.  Richardson,  which  is  among  the  tallest 
peonies,  often  growing  five  feet  high. 

T.  C.  Thurlow,  of  West  Newbury,  Massa- 
chusetts, was  one  of  the  early  growers  in  this 
country.  Starting  in  1875,  after  some  years' 
work  he  got  together  a  large  collection  which  in- 
cluded most  of  the  varieties  which  had  been  in- 
troduced. James  Hartshorn  of  Chicago,  on 
looking  over  Mr.  Thurlow's  grounds,  examining 
the  labels  and  taking  note  of  the  different  kinds, 
asked  that  a  price  be  named  for  the  whole  lot  of 
peonies.  On  all  of  his  peonies,  except  two  plants 
each  of  a  hundred  varieties,  Mr.  Thurlow  fixed 
nine  thousand  dollars,  which  figure  was  forthwith 
accepted.  The  collection  filled  two  freight  cars. 
After  the  plants  had  been  shipped,  Mr.  Thurlow 
started  to  get  up  a  new  collection,  better  than 
the  one  he  had  sold. 

Recently  the  seedlings  of  Brand — notably 
Martha  Bulloch  (1907),  and  Frances  Willard 
(1907) — have  aroused  much  admiration.  The 
beautiful  productions  of  Shaylor,  among  which 
are  Frances  Shaylor  (1909),  Jessie  Shaylor 
(1909),  and  Mary  Woodbury  Shaylor  (1910), 
show  what  is  being  accomplished  in  this  country 
by  careful  hand  pollination. 

62 


FELIX  CROUSSE 

(Crousse,  1881) 


Bomb  type.     A  brilliant  flower  of  good  form  which  blooms  freely 


MYTHOLOGY,  AND  HISTORY  OF  THE  PEONY 

Other  persons  who,  as  hybridisers  or  growers, 
have  been  closely  connected  with  peony  history 
in  this  country  since  1850  are:  Mrs.  Sarah  E. 
Pleas,  now  over  eighty-five  years  of  age,  who 
originated  Jubilee  and  Opal  No.  2,  Rosenfield 
(Floral  Treasure,  1900,  and  Karl  Roseniield, 
1908),  Fewkes,  Ellwanger,  Peterson,  Ward, 
Barry  and  Harrison. 

The  admiration  in  this  country  for  the  peony, 
which  started  about  1850,  has  continued  to  wax — 
with  occasional  wanings — until  the  present  time. 
But  the  growth  in  favour  has  had  disadvantages 
as  well  as  advantages:  about  1900,  the  number 
of  different  varieties  introduced  from  seeds  and 
from  importations  of  plants  (chiefly  from  Eng- 
land and  the  Continent)  had  grown  to  such  a  size 
that  considerable  confusion  in  nomenclature  was 
caused.  The  difficulty  a  purchaser  had  in  get- 
ting the  kind  ordered  became  so  great  that  it 
seriously  affected  the  peony  trade  as  well  as  the 
dispositions  of  many  peony  buyers.  Unscrupu- 
lous growers — some,  alas,  are  always  with  us — 
put  on  the  market  hundreds  of  new  seedlings 
which  they  christened  with  good  old  names.  One 
expert  feelingly  described  the  condition  of  the 

63 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

peony  business  at  this  time  as  "  utterly  chaotic." 
To  replace  confusion  with  order  a  few  peony 
enthusiasts  and  growers  in  the  summer  of  1902 
started  the  movement  which  resulted  in  the  fol- 
lowing year  in  the  incorporation  of  the  American 
Peony  Society,  of  which  C.  W.  Ward  was  the 
first  President,  and  A.  H.  Fewkes  the  first  Secre- 
tary. The  original  purpose  of  the  Society  was 
"  to  advance  public  interest  in  the  peony  and 
especially  to  straighten  out  peony  nomenclature." 
In  1904,  the  Society  agreed  to  co-operate  with 
the  Horticultural  Department  of  the  Experi- 
ment Station  at  Cornell  University  for  the  pur- 
pose of  making  a  study  of  all  the  varieties  of 
peonies  which  it  was  possible  to  obtain.  To  an 
appeal  for  plants  of  different  kinds,  a  liberal 
response  was  made  by  those  having  large  collec- 
tions. Nearly  every  prominent  grower  in  this 
country  sent  samples  from  his  stock:  in  addition 
contributions  were  made  from  the  finest  collec- 
tions in  Europe,  including  two  hundred  plants 
from  A.  Dessert  at  Chanonceaux. 

The  first  plantings  at  Cornell  in  1904  soon 
increased  to  thousands  of  specimens  having  up- 
wards of  twenty-six  hundred  names — practically 

64 


MYTHOLOGY,  AND  HISTORY  OF  THE  PEONY 

all  the  varieties  in  commerce.  Within  three  or 
four  years  most  of  the  plants  were  well  estab- 
lished and  had  begun  to  yield  characteristic 
blooms.  For  five  years  the  Nomenclature  Com- 
mittee of  the  Society,  Bertrand  H.  Farr  and 
Joseph  Dauphin,  together  with  an  expert  horti- 
culturist at  Cornell,  Dr.  Leon  C.  Batchelor, 
worked  over  this  collection  and  compared  their 
observations  with  studies  carried  on  by  them  at 
several  of  the  large  nurseries  in  the  eastern  part 
of  the  country.  With  painstaking  and  disinter- 
ested labour,  nearly  all  distinct  varieties  usually 
grown  were  identified  and  described  as  to  form, 
colour  and  fragrance  of  flower  and  vigour,  habit 
and  floriferous  qualities  of  the  plant.  After 
eliminating  the  numerous  synonyms  and  the  kinds 
wrongly  named — in  a  number  of  instances  the 
same  variety  appeared  under  as  many  as  twenty 
different  designations — the  twenty-six  hundred 
names  contained  in  the  complete  list  were  sifted 
down  to  five  hundred  separate  meritorious  vari- 
eties. These  five  hundred — which  were  mostly 
varieties  of  P.  albiflora — comprise  nearly  all  of 
the  peonies  of  value  to  be  found  in  the  entire 

5  65 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 
collection.  The  description  in  detail,  a  check  list 
of  peonies  and  numerous  data  in  reference  to  the 
peony,  have  been  published  in  four  Bulletins  by 
Cornell  University,  1907-1911.  The  Peony 
Society  has  thus  rendered  a  service  of  incalcu- 
lable benefit  to  the  peony  growers  not  only  in 
America,  but  everywhere.  The  amateur  is  thank- 
ful for  its  efforts  whenever  he  places  an  order, 
or  wants  assistance  in  identifying  some  plant  in 
his  garden. 

The  American  Peony  Society  has  also  done 
valuable  work  in  other  lines.  It  has  held  large 
and  successful  exhibitions  at  New  York,  Chicago, 
Philadelphia,  Boston  and  Ithaca.  The  splendid 
display  of  flowers  shown  has  attracted  attention 
and  aroused  enthusiasm,  which  has  rapidly  in- 
creased in  the  past  few  years.  In  1911,  at  the 
exhibition  held  in  Philadelphia,  the  sum  of  two 
hundred  and  thirty-two  dollars  was  offered  in 
prizes.  In  1916,  at  the  New  York  exhibition  the 
aggregate  of  the  premium  list  was  six  hundred 
dollars,  divided  among  twenty-six  classes.  At 
this  exhibition  there  were  over  fifteen  hundred 
blooms  staged,  and  more  than  sixteen  thousand 


MYTHOLOGY,  AND  HISTORY  OF  THE  PEONY 

persons  attended.  The  American  Peony  Society 
has  issued  reports  from  time  to  time  and  has  re- 
cently started  the  publication  of  a  bulletin  con- 
taining items  and  articles  of  interest  in  reference 
to  the  peony  called  "  Bulletin  of  Peony  News  " 
which  appears  twice  a  year. 

In  1916,  The  Northwestern  Peony  and  Iris 
Society  was  formed  in  Minneapolis. 


67 


BEST  VARIETIES  AND 
THEIR  CHARACTERISTICS 


CHAPTER  III 

BEST  VARIETIES  AND  THEIR 
CHARACTERISTICS 

THE  selection  of  any  flowers  for  the  garden 
is  largely  a  matter  of  taste  and  therefore  an 
expression  of  personality.  In  order  to  make  a 
choice,  however,  one  must  have  a  clear  idea  of 
existing  varieties  and  which  of  these  are  obtain- 
able. As  we  have  seen,  hundreds  of  varieties  of 
P.  albiflora  have  been  listed;  but  as  many  have 
proved  to  be  the  same  as  others,  with  different 
names,  and  many  are  so  inferior  as  to  be  not 
worth  cultivating,  the  number  of  available  kinds 
that  are  desirable  is  not  so  overwhelming  as  might 
at  first  appear.  Broadly  speaking  there  are  about 
five  hundred  varieties  which  are  admirable  in 
gardens:  this  list  of  five  hundred  might  advan- 
tageously be  restricted  to  a  much  smaller  number 
containing  only  those  of  distinction  and  value. 

A  Main  List 
I  give  a  Main  List  of  one  hundred  and  twenty- 
five  varieties  selected  on  their  merits.    It  includes 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

desirable  peonies  of  all  prices,  from  a  few  of  the 
new  and  costly  seedlings  down  to  some  of  the  most 
charming  of  the  inexpensive  sorts.  As  several 
of  the  loveliest  peonies  fortunately  increase  with 
comparative  rapidity  they  may  be  bought  at  rea- 
sonable prices :  a  number  of  attractive  kinds  may 
be  purchased  as  low  as  fifty  and  seventy-five 
cents  apiece.  One  of  the  delights  of  a  peony 
garden  is  that  it  is  possible  to  lay  the  foundation 
of  a  satisfying  collection  by  starting  with  the 
standard  varieties  of  moderate  price,  and  adding 
the  more  rare  and  costly  roots  from  time  to  time 
as  one's  experience  and  taste  direct,  and  one's 
garden  bank  account  permits. 

Short  Lists 
Immediately  preceding  the  Main  List  will 
be  found  six  Short  Lists  which  are  intended  to 
assist  those  who  are  unacquainted  with  the  dif- 
ferent varieties  of  peonies  or  whose  preferences 
may  be  for  white,  or  pink,  or  red  peonies.  In 
each  of  these  colours,  I  have  made  a  selection 
of  kinds  which  are  considered  among  the  best. 
A  list  of  peonies  of  distinction  and  beauty  at  a 
low  cost,  and  another  list  of  rare  and  exquisite 

72 


FESTIVA  MAXIMA 
(Miellez,  1851) 

type.     One  of  the  finest  white  varieties.    An  early  and  reliable  bloomer.    This  inexpensive 
peony  should  be  in  every  garden 


VARIETIES  AND  THEIR  CHARACTERISTICS 

peonies  for  the  enthusiastic  collector  are  added. 
These  Short  Lists  are  lettered  A,  B,  C,  D,  E  and 
F,  and  are  referred  to  in  column  4  of  the  Main 
List. 

The  varieties  of  P.  albiflora  which  I  give  in 
the  Main  List,  together  with  the  species  de- 
scribed in  Chapter  IV,  are  the  most  striking  and 
beautiful  peonies  for  our  gardens.  Species  such 
as  P.  arietina,  P.  corallina,  P.  decora  and  others 
are  best  left  for  ardent  collectors  to  study  and 
experiment  with:  for  while  extremely  interest- 
ing as  members  of  the  peony  family  and  pos- 
sibly useful  for  hybridisation,  they  lack  size, 
charm  and  variety  of  colour.  Although  the  her- 
baceous peonies  of  Japan  have  much  merit  and 
are  well  worth  a  place  in  our  gardens,  it  is  im- 
possible to  give  an  extended  list  of  their  names 
that  would  be  dependable.  As  the  peonies  ordered 
from  Japan  seldom  come  true  to  description  or 
even  twice  alike,  the  direct  importation  of  these 
peonies  must  be  undertaken  as  a  pleasing  game 
of  chance.  One  or  two  growers  in  this  country 
and  in  France  have  propagated  from  imported 
Japanese  stock,  and  from  these  growers  a  few, 
but  only  a  few,  good  ones  can  be  obtained  with 
assurance  of  getting  what  is  ordered. 

73 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

In  preparing  the  Main  List,  which  is  in- 
tended to  be  a  guide  and  not  an  exhaustive  study 
of  each  flower,  the  descriptions  have  been  made 
as  simple  and  untechnical  as  is  practical.  Brief 
explanations  as  to  a  few  botanical  terms,  "  types," 
colours  and  fragrance  will,  nevertheless,  be 
necessary. 

Types 
In  the  process  of  development  from  the  original 
single  type,  the  herbaceous  peony  has  acquired 
certain  forms  or  types  which  have  been  classified 
and  named  "  bomb,"  "  crown,"  "  rose,"  etc.,  the 
full  descriptions  of  Which  I  set  out  below.  The 
stamens — the  fertilising  organs  of  flowering 
plants,  consisting  of  (a)  filaments  or  supports, 
and  (b)  anthers  or  double  sacs  filled  with  pollen 
— have  in  some  types  of  the  peony  broadened 
and  thickened  into  additional  petals  called  stami- 
nodes.  Likewise  the  carpels — the  seed-bearing 
organs — have  developed  into  petals  called  car- 
pelodes.  For  brevity  and  convenience  staminodes 
and  carpelodes  are  usually  called  petaloids.  The 
words  staminodes,  carpelodes  and  petaloids  are 
all  used  in  describing  types.      When  the  word 


VARIETIES  AND  THEIR  CHARACTERISTICS 

"  guards  "  is  employed  it  means  the  outside  or 
primary  petals.  When  the  word  "  differen- 
tiated "  occurs  reference  is  made  to  the  degree 
of  difference  in  appearance  between  the  outside 
petals  or  guards  and  the  petaloids  within. 

The  names  of  the  types  and  their  descriptions 
follow: 


Details  of  Types 

1.    SINGLE 

Peonies  of  this  class  are  com- 
posed of  a  few  broad  petals,  a 
single  row  of  which  surrounds  a 
mass  of  pollen-bearing  stamens 
and  seed-bearing  carpels. 

Example:  Le  Printemps. 
(Note  illustration.) 


Single. 


Japanese. 


2.    JAPANESE 

In  this  class  the  doubling 
process  has  just  begun.  The 
filaments  of  the  stamens  have 
broadened  and  the  anthers  have 
become  extremely  large.  The 
guard  petals  remain  the  same  as 
in  the  single  type. 

Example:  Mrs.  McKinley. 
(Note  colour-plate.) 

75 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 


Anemone. 


Semi-double. 


Crown. 


3.    ANEMONE 

This  is  the  next  development 
in  the  process  of  doubling.  The 
filaments  of  the  stamens  are  still 
broader  than  in  the  Japanese 
type,  having  become  narrow 
petals  which  fill  the  centre  of  the 
bloom.  While  the  anthers  have 
completely  disappeared,  the 
centre  petals  are  still  narrow 
and  short.  There  are  few  high- 
class  varieties  of  this  type. 
Example:  Anemoniflora  rubra. 

4*.    SEMI-DOUBLE 

Flowers  of  this  type  contain 
filaments  which  have  widened 
irregularly,  making  petaloids  of 
varying  widths  throughout 
which  stamens  are  mixed.  The 
guard  petals  may  or  may  not  be 
clearly  differentiated. 

Example:  Stephania.  (Note 
colour-plate. ) 

5.  CROWN 
In  this  class  the  petaloids 
originating  from  the  carpels 
differ  from  the  petaloids,  de- 
veloping from  the  stamens  as 
well  as  from  the  guard  petals. 

Example :  Madame  de  Vatry. 
(Note  colour-plate.) 
76 


VARIETIES  AND  THEIR  CHARACTERISTICS 


Bomb. 


6.    BOMB 

In  this  type  the  petaloids 
derived  from  both  carpels  and 
stamens  have  become  much 
broader,  without  any  crown,  but 
still  are  clearly  differentiated 
from  the  guard  petals. 

Example:  Felix  Crousse. 
(Note  colour-plate.) 


SEMI-ROSE 


Semi 


Rose. 


In  flowers  of  this  class  all  the 
petals  are  uniformly  wide,  dif- 
fering from  the  full  rose  type 
in  the  presence  of  a  few  stamens. 

Example:  Asa  Gray.  (Note 
colour-plate. ) 

8.  rose  (full-double) 
This  type  completes  the  proc- 
ess of  doubling.  All  the  sta- 
mens and  carpels  have  developed 
into  petals  resembling  the  guard 
petals. 

Example :  Mme.  Lemonier. 
(Note  illustration.) 


77 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

Colours 
In  the  Main  List,  I  have  given  in  ordinary 
terms  the  details  of  shadings  and  combinations 
immediately  under  the  name  of  each  variety  and 
have  placed  the  colour  of  the  general  effect  in 
a  separate  column.  I  have  avoided  the  use  of 
such  expressions  as  Tyrian  rose,  Solferino  red 
and  purple-garnet  (which  as  a  matter  of  fact 
contains  less  purple  than  other  shades  bearing  no 
mention  of  purple).  The  colour  terminology 
used  by  the  professional  growers  is  confusing 
and  misleading  to  a  beginner.  For  the  informa- 
tion of  those  who  care  to  compare  the  trade  terms 
with  actual  samples  of  colour,  I  would  state  that 
the  chart  used  by  the  American  Peony  Society 
is  the  "  Repertoire  des  Couleurs  pour  aider  a  la 
determination  des  Couleurs  des  Fleurs,  des  Feuil- 
lages  et  des  Fruits."  This  elaborate  work,  pub- 
lished by  the  Societe  Francaise  des  Chrysan- 
themistes  in  Lyons  in  1905,  comes  in  three  vol- 
umes, or  rather  portfolios,  and  contains  over 
fourteen  hundred  shades.  There  has  been  some 
discussion  as  to  the  respective  merits  of  this  chart 
and  Ridgeway's  "  Colour  Standards  and  Nomen- 

78 


SUZANNE   DESSERT 

(Dessert  and  Mechin,  1890) 

Semi-rose  type.     Deep  pink  peonies  of  merit  are  not  numerous.     Suzanne  Dessert   while  it  ha,  n  ,W.W 

mauve  tint,  possesses  great  beauty,  which  is  accentuated  by  golden  stameZ >  and  rilver-tilfped  pCl !, Ls 


VARIETIES  AND  THEIR  CHARACTERISTICS 

clature."  *  Much  is  to  be  said  in  favour  of  each 
chart.  However,  as  there  are  many  garden 
owners  who  do  not  possess  either,  or  do  not  feel 
the  need  of  one,  I  have  not  employed  the  cryptic 
colour  terms  used  in  both. 

It  is  to  be  noted  that  the  colours  of  all  peonies 
vary  somewhat  in  accordance  with  the  age  and 
strength  of  the  plants  and  the  constituents  of  the 
soil.  There  may  be  an  intensification  of  colours 
in  different  years  due  to  the  vagaries  of  the 
weather.  This  year,  1916,  Avalanche  had  such 
a  strong  tinge  of  yellow  throughout  as  to  appear 
almost  another  flower.  Allowance  should  also  be 
made  for  the  fact  that  peonies  fade  in  strong 
sunlight. 

Size  and  Season 

Size  is  also  a  comparative  matter.  The  actual 
dimensions  in  inches  vary  in  each  case  with  the 
degree  of  cultivation.  The  descriptions,  "  very 
large,"  "  large,"  "  medium  "  and  "  small,"  which 
I  have  used  in  column  6,  refer  to  the  size  of  the 
peony  in  question  compared  to  other  varieties  of 
peonies  grown  under  the  same  conditions. 

The  different  varieties  of  albiflora  have  a 

1  Published  by  Mr.  Ridgeway,  Washington,  D.  C,  1912. 
79 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

season  of  bloom  which  lasts  from  three  to  four 
weeks.  Reference  to  their  comparative  time  of 
bloom  within  this  season  is  made  in  column  7. 
In  the  vicinity  of  New  York  the  earliest  varieties 
begin  to  flower  during  the  last  week  in  May. 

Fragrance 
Fragrance  is  so  largely  a  matter  of  personal 
preference  that  I  hesitate  to  mention  it  in  my 
list.  The  American  Peony  Society  has  adopted 
a  plan  of  marking  fragrance  as  follows :  pleasant 
odour,  single,  double  or  triple  X;  unpleasant 
odour,  single,  double  or  triple  X.  I  have  found 
these  descriptions  misleading  and,  as  the  sense  of 
smell  is  extremely  variable,  I  fear  others  may 
likewise  be  disappointed.  For  example,  Madame 
D.  Treyeran  is  marked  by  the  Society:  "Fra- 
grance, pleasant,  XXX."  In  my  opinion  this 
flower  has  merely  the  suggestion  of  a  pleasant 
odour.  In  my  Main  List  I  have  simply  marked 
those  that  are  fragrant  with  an  X.  This  runs 
the  entire  gamut  from  a  pleasant  freshness  of 
odour  up  to  intoxicating  fragrance.  The  degree 
of  sweetness  had  best  be  decided  by  the  pros- 
pective purchaser  according  to  his  own  keenness 
of  perception  of  perfume  values.     When  scent 


SARAH  BERNHARDT 

(Lemoine,  1906) 

Semi-rose  type.     Moderately  deep  pink  peony  of  fine  form 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 


SIX  SHORT  LISTS 
LIST  A 

TWELVE    FINE    WHITE    PEONIES 


Avalanche 
Baroness  Schroeder 
Duchesse  de  Nemours 
Festiva  Maxima 
James  Kelway 
La  Tendresse 


Madame  Crousse 
Marie  Jacquin 
Marie  Lemoine 
Mireille 

Monsieur  Dupont 
Stephania 


LIST  B 

TWELVE  FINE   PALE   PINK   PEONIES 


Aurore 

Eugenie  Verdier 
Germaine  Bigot 
Livingstone 
Madame  Lemonier 
Marie  Crousse 


Marguerite  Gerard 
Milton  Hill 
Reine  Hortense 
Simonne  Chevalier 
Tourangelle 
Venus 


LIST  C 

EIGHT    FINE    DEEP    PINK    PEONIES 


Alexandre  Dumas 
Auguste  Villaume 
Claire  Dubois 
Madame  Geissler 
Modele  de  Perfection 


Monsieur  Jules  Elie 
Souvenir  de  l'Exposition 

Universelle 
Suzanne  Dessert 


82 


VARIETIES  AND  THEIR  CHARACTERISTICS 


LIST  D 


TWELVE    FINE    RED    PEONIES 


Adolphe  Rousseau 
Delachei 
Felix  Crousse 
General  de  Boisdeffre 
Grover  Cleveland 
Karl  Rosenfield 


Madame   Bucquet 

Madame  Mechin 

Monsieur  Martin  Cahuzac 

Pierre  Dessert 

Raphael 

Rubens 


LIST  E 

TWELVE    PEONIES    OF    DISTINCTION    AND    BEAUTY    AT 
LOW    COST 


Asa  Gray 
Couronne  d'Or 
Due  de  Wellington 
Grandiflora  Nivea  Plena 
Lamartine  (Calot) 
La  Rosiere 


Madame  Calot 
Madame  de  Galhau 
Madame  de  Vatry 
Madame  de  Verneville 
Mathilde  de  Roseneck 
Solfatare 


LIST  F 


TWELVE    BARE    AND    EXQUISITE    PEONIES 


Alsace-Lorraine 

Gismonda 

Kelway's  Glorious 

Le  Cygne 

Madame  Jules  Dessert 

Martha  Bulloch 


Mary  Woodbury   Shaylor 
Primevere 

Sarah  Bernhardt  (Lemoine) 
Solange 
Therese 
Walter  Faxon 
S3 


°  S  o 

£3 


§§11 


-•2  5-E 

3    flflS 


a     5 


J3  S 


Sg 


*n 

o 

as 

ao 

o 

E1 

Bll 

^a 

s  t 

||| 

r 

r~ 

oo2g 

X 

X 

X 

X 

M 

a 

O 

>> 

£ig 

•ol 

■  - 

Tig 

i   a 

w 

wSS 

(-1 

ss 

S8 

£1 

h) 

<DT3 

««2    S 


1 

I 


■8fl 


22 


(£2 


o 
US 


--■as 


5-    S 

o  =2 


£& 
>$ 


•3-cg 

gff 

«£«« 

1" 

£"3 

> 

« 

H 

s 

d 

03 

>>_>> 
>" 

ft         a-= 

•.a    •-■g 


«s  S 


o 


s£ 


300 
ooo 

6~ 


OOO       —00 


Si8" 
< 


j.  or5    O  a  m 

"2^-SiS- 

g  •-  a>  ps  ja  hjo  a 

5?'5p^  -■= 


«  03  0 


Q-.-S- 


*2  "■ 


ll.l 


-IS 


■  i3  »  o  2 .2  °  > 


:gf-.r?£S  - 
■o  &  ttfl  •  o  f.S^Jg  d  £  £ 
&^"m.2  « "^.-JsgH  g^  * 


""  Sj3   |2        H-2 


2^ 


^i  .*<  J3 


o-g 


85 


^ 

^ 

J, 

J, 

i 

-0 

01 

_3 

3 

3 

2 

s 

3 

OJ 

a 

Em 

-o 

"O 

■d 

■B 

•B 

[  2 

a 

a 

a 

a 

a 

1  -s 

O    — 

a 

a 

(3 

a 

OS 

a 

^ 

es  O 

ft 

w 

ii 

as 

■a  m 

OS'S 

"f  a 

|| 

§1 

a 

C~ 

a 

c" 

U^ 

0 

a"*" 

o 

3 
O 

o 

"*1 

m    •  ° 

Pi 

^3  rt 

a 
o 

a  « 

si 

if  s 

II 

M 

<u 

mJ 

OJXl 

^s 

■ai 

U  0 

05     — 

ti  E 

'5  J2 

Si 

as 
.2  & 

T3   O 

o 
W 

e  o 
o  o 

Si 

3 

;g-rs 
11  § 

E    -  o 

B-gs 

_-  o 

6    a 
5-gs 

-0  jj  0 

2* 

E   . 

3-g 

•3  « 

^E 

"3  miS 

"3  ti 

>S  M 

Is3 

^j  £ 

H 

s 

H 

H 

^ 

S 

0) 

X 

X 

X 

X 

M 

a 

■    B 

■  o 

■  0 

« 

■iS 

£•«§ 

o 

1 

•ag 

» 

3 

J 

—  OS 

w  a  s 

Hi 

h3 

ofi 

>> 

a 

2 

O 

0 

°So 

<D    ^ 

■3 

M 

tf 

M 

33 

>" 

1 

03 
Hi 

£ 

►3 

03 

03 

M 

0> 

a 

oil 

0) 

3 

03.2 

P<a 

•g 

o'5* 

0) 

■O 

■a 

o  » 

£ 

£ 

$ 

« 

« 

tX    .- 

<! 

o 

W 

Q 

a) 

J, 

J, 

«    £ 

g 

o 

'as 

s 

21 

O 

a 

H 

0 

q 

0 

0 

« 

O 

w 

tf 

00 

01 

tf 

to 

Is 

in"13  "** 

*o> 

3 

OJ 

-tTN 

So 

X 

&00 

Is 

■gS 

300 

300 

S>o 

h~v 

—  oo 

ooo 

"300 

000 

—  00 

'H  o 

0>  — • 

Oh 

5  " 

M 

o 

o 

d~ 

O^ 

O 

Q 

1 
a 

T3 

a 

h 

o 
0 

p 

( 

% 
c 

a 
t 
'. 
J 

1 

I1 

^  - 
33  s 

o 
a 

a 

•  £ 

£a 

■<  a 

a  d  * 

.3  H  03 
3  Q  <n 
™  u""3 

3, 

lb 

■r.    i 

00      •   OJ 

oj2  ■ 

> 

a>  m  cJ 
.-2  3-a 

.a-fl  © 
&.£•£ 

3  a 

Pi 

-co 

5 

03 

y. 

a 

p 

1 
£ 

?! 

cflS 

St 

0  o 

—  3 

S 
/) 

■a 

a 

"a^.&a 
'ftsH  0 

ei     1 

-0  g"d  3 

3 

■0 

c 

3 

O 

| 

2 

— 
C 

S5 

-d 

— 

-  c 

x  a 

fa 

a 
E 

I 

03 
M 
^^ 

a  0 

a 

r 

a 

.2  o 

a 
3 

3 

Jf 

3 
O 

<u  O  > 

> « s 

■sg> 

"o 

c 
c 

C 

n 

pa 

K 

pa 

C 

c 

C 

c 

8r; 


*5 


1-2 


m  O 


Sg 


^0g       ^ 

flag     a , 


a  a 

-a  m 

«  a 

"Ha 

o 

a 

O 

O 

*i   - 

a 
fc 

s 

-a  13 

|£ 

a 

a 

J3 

o  n 

•as 

.s    tja 


s> 

H 

S           H 

H 

h        w 

i-? 

2 

K 

X 

K          H 

X 

X        « 

X 

X 

w 

■  a 
•eg 

Mid- 
season 
to  late 

Late 

>> 

a 
W 

all 

■  a 

•a  2 
—  a 

■  a 

•x  a 

.« 


.-I 


.-    c    4) 

»  H  fl 

•"■So 


1-S 

a" 


•«      o 

ip 


B  a 

a 


££ 


«*« 

g*E 

^■°*aM 

<5 

w 

gS 

00  >"  9 

« 

X 

M 

X 

M 

•"     1 

j>> 

_>. 

•a  g 

<u 

2  §3 

5 

•08 

£ 

H 

w 

ss 

►J 

SS5 

h3 

ss 

:! 


S.2 


305 

ooo 


•2  a1 
a 


jjs 

<L 

tt  H 

ii     * 

^ 

JO 

! 

I 

GQJ<t 

I! 

02,° 

Jag 

eight.    Fair 

rower.      U 

loomer 

e       bloome 

rower 

Is 

■a 

=3* 

03 

as 

*•  * 

m 

|l 

.2* 
■§2 

Mediu 

stron 
certa 
Tall, 
Stror 

.2 

ss     ss 


r-fc 


«T3  & 


as 

^2 


§2 
o 


o 

3 

1 

g 

d 

T3 

•a 

-o 

o   _. 

d 

03 

0) 

a    . 
'2  a 

c 

■2S 

c 

d 

-a  si 
£  d 

d 

■a  «i 

£  a 

&t 

3 

O 

a 

u 

a" 

O 

o 

M 

•  -5 

•-  2 

2§ 

•J 

eJ3 

■a  ;  i 
3  1  a 

a 

60 

a 
o 

.13 

S  d  h 

£d§ 

1 

"3 
o 

b2 

a>  to 

d  m  «> 

.2  o  o 
|W3 

.a 

—  o 

—  o 
«3 

ag3 
PI 

k3ijh 

H 

> 

H 

w 

0) 

^  *  d 

M 

X 

« 

X 

M 

a 
-I 

©a 

(O  4)  g 

>> 

>> 

>. 

0) 

1 

a>  £j 

•  3 

bd 

'Sx> 

>~ 

> 

h-i 

>~ 

?<> 

0 

«i3J> 

3 

■a 

2 

M 

£ 

« 

£ 

ft 

Ph 

*  J 

Q 

fa 

o 

l. 

d 

%s 

I 

as 

£ 

o 

o 

o 

M 

w 

« 

tf 

O 

•o 

a  * 

C 

01 

X 

>> 

d 

n'B* 

3o 

18 

sg 

r 

«" 

M^ 

,3^ 

1 

o 
a 
•a 
a 
3 

►  *■ 

"3 

a> 

a 

0) 

B 

! 

0 

! 

r 

5    M 

CC    C 

H 

T)   C 

o  rt 

S~ 

0 

>  o 

0  «* 

lis 

sll 

lis 

era  a, 

£d 
.  o  o 

Cj<    01 

°  Sa 

M  2  u 

& 

6 
[ 

c 
»  i 

J.   » 

33 

0 

So 

c 

>3 

>  c 

u  c 

53 

c 

►  i 

a;  a  2 

*3S 

ba  ft  js 
9     ° 

§  s 

W«  o 

J2 

G 

Q 

3 

•  >-  t.  o 

•  <u  d 

a  D  „•  -3 
3  «!  o  N!l 

Mils 

^  >_  o  2  is 
o  jr  o  a,  o 

^  ik 

d  ft."  a  s 

a°1«§ 

o  d  "ffi  d  — 

ft°5    3  « 

m3=  kCQjs 
c  ftlS  o      2 
2  _  ftz  ^J3 

rt  d       W       i 
Mrs  —  l-  ^"O  ts 

SsS'dl 

>   cS   "ftM 

3d  «a  £-2 
&  g  aO  m«3 

jg 

u 

,J 

►J 

>- 

a 


ft 


_-5j 


s.9     K.! 


S  9 


aS 


&   O  4> 

_-  p  o      „-  £ 


£5 


«^ 

^ 

*M3 

"cafe     ,2  «i 

Eh          2 

£* 

"3> 

« 

« 

X 

X       : 

x 

« 

■  a 

is 

IV 

■  0 
■si 

il 

c9 

Mid- 
season 

Mid- 
season 

>> 

i  a 
-a  8 

•-.  C3 

^2 


I  OS  oc 


22 


g0DQ  d 


i  m  S'E 


is  I 


"   n   K    °   ' 

i  i *™ » : 

i2g|Sc 


°'S- 


obS 


C  J; 

=3  s'&o 


'  .£        °        «>  i*:3 
"     S    £*.is  12-2 

m£«    cS^mS   rs^l5 


flu's  ^"3  fl  3~3  ■*  o  ~ -°  P-i  .2  ■£  t£  s£  0  at-ii5  ~     **£; 
^  hJ  J  ^  h)  h3 

91 


J, 

^ 

j, 

J, 

J. 

3 

"9 

-0 

T) 

■0 

©  z 

B 

03 

rH       a 

a 

M 

a 

a 

I 

f| 

•0 

■Ha 

^^ 

li 

{* 

m 

3 

"'& 

"J-^ 

O 

O 

O 

O 

0 

O 

£ 

|-s> 

*3>  So 

0  0 

fe-S°3 
a  .Ma* 
*S.i    tfs 

O  8 

.Sfw 
> 

A  0 

A  m 

(E   S 

2— 

M2 
BA 

ctgS 
ogfe 

■Sg^-all 

A-v  u 

Jfl  O 
O 

5  s 

^3tf  O  >. 

^2 

w 

s  5  S 
■3  £  S  ° 

3oA8M 

T3  2  0 

as 
.3  <" 
II 

l°3 

|g.S8 
5  <5fc3 

Us 

H 

H 

X 

a 

O 

"  3 

4) 

OS 

T3   g 

>>* 

0 

=3 

1  fl 

Si 

0  s  0 

i»3 

Ml 

OS 

0 
Ml 
a 

s 

►J 

a 

3 

=3 

0  • 

s 

_  0 

a^ 

£ 

OS  CJ 
>> 

CM 

a 

ji 

3 

-i 

fe 

pq 

Q 

0 

• 

• 

• 

• 

«  a 

a§ 

0 

08 

as 

a  8 

H 

og 

a 

0 

*  s 

■»y 

»S 

CO 

o3 

« 

CO 

CO 

CB 

g  j« 

- 

- 

^; 

M"°  >> 

Sot 

fero 

°Q0 

2ti 

Is 

^2 

a 
I-] 

000 

6"1 

0102 
Q 

—  CO 
OjCO 

*2 

O 
fl 
•O 

0 

^•c  S3 

03J3 
>  *» 

O 

I 
1 

s 
t 

Eil 

3      c3 

0  g  > 

I-§1 

ag.s 
S"| 

Woo 

■     0 
a  0  0 

-3  Si  a 
10  S  3  fl 
■O           0       g 
§3"  TO      > 

S-O  ra  3  0  ' 

•a  -§3o&" 

a  m  c  0  R 

°  >,  0  u  3  3-°  °  2 
Oa'S  aw  cr^lz;  > 

«5        .<3<3      0.  0  0 

2|   sS'S    3-|I 

>3BhO       >S(u        O 

^  on  a  3    0  Sj« 

VA  S  h^S             Hj.S   3  fc 

O  aW  ^OaiS^a'S; 

S3      »* 

33&c§ 

O   X  ^<   3 
"°   03  fl-f  2 

o5Sa^ 

H 

_ 

s 

s 

? 

92 


J, 

„i 

J, 

^ 

j, 

j, 

i 

j, 

2 

3 

a 

3 

3 

3 

3 

a 

■a 

T3 

TJ 

T) 

T3 

•o 

■o 

T! 

a 

a 

a 

a 

a 

a 

a 

a 

a 

0 

a 

a 

a 

a 

a 

c 

B 

it 

■§* 

|.i 

"2  3 

i§ 

|.g 

ca 

^a 

as 

a '5 

a  "5 

C 

^ 

O 

o~ 

o 

o 

u"" 

o~ 

o 

6 

h 

£ 

•as 

DQ 

sis 

feoa 

a  o 

*;     ° 

£-3S 

f 
> 

2    0 
-    0 

_-  CJ 

jd  4> 

E* 
|i 

M 

0   g 

Is 

■  0 

—  o 

s3 

4> 

~a 
p 

|1 

•^  ffl  u 

111 
1-2 

•sga 

ja  ■-  o 
a  &^ 

TJja  o 

•55^ 
llg| 

2^   . 

"-4)8 

4 

x 

X 

x 

« 

H 

X 

^ 

o 

o 

_>. 

"0  ° 

* 

_>» 

a 

a 

£8 

U 

J 

hJ 

ij 

w 

w 

w 

►-? 

>> 

£& 

£  So 

> 

"  S 

►J 

3  5 

TJ  — 
|5 

.2  ™ 
-3.2 

|5 

►3 

>3 

4) 

a 

4) 

a 

4>T3 

a 

u 

2H9 
^  aa 

I 

3 
£ 

a 

a 

i 

£ 

B 

w 

< 

w 

W 

w 

0) 

1 

a 

o 

51 

a 
o 

.a 

a 

a 

8 

o 

« 

6 

« 

0D 

O 

« 

« 

« 

N" 

- 

o 

^J 

a 

o 

a" 

4." 

o 

D 

.11 

-g 

5co 
Ogo 

22 

DiO 

goo 

4)00 

Ooo 

S~ 

o 

U 

Q 

O 

ort 

§" 

urt 

•  a) 
a© 

Si 
£5 

S 
o 

a 
o 

_2 

2^3 

1S2 

3 
0 

"3 

a 
o 

a 

t 

■~  —  ii 
ps  a5 

E 

a    :5Sc 

g>asa 

to 
"3 

o 

a 

4)  B-a« 

°.    8 

«J  o 

ft 

^  c  >, 
-S""3   • 

4)  o  a  _ 

i- 

c 

111- 

5  a  &  a 

0 

— 

a 

- 

Sgl-I 

M"3 

°"a 

Q  *& 

2  5    "3  5    ^g°-?2 

a    . 

»•«  >»    r"S  £f^  4.  S 

q   3  41 

n 

1 

ills 
"lis 

■<(».2  -sfei 

o  o  §  a.^.tS 
2  -<0'5  o  i: 

■SgSSJS 

4>  £  H—  w        MB^  m  v  u 

a 

a 

a 

2 

2 

2 

a 

a 

93 


o 

_3 

"3 

o    > 

i-i    & 

0. 
02 

Cutting. 

Cutting. 
Cutting. 

Cutting. 

Si 

Oj 

a 

-iT                                '  2  m  <u    •     ^  a)                                      a 

°                       M.-  is*    o 

:s           •«!"§.£  :»:               i 

5  *  £                        J3.S  o  ft     t-5  <u                                    g 

.-2 a                   q s    e-«&                     * 

-SM§                      SagS  §§!§&,.                             %u 

^-o                       »n»apS^5                              -.2 

h3)!<                                    *_02   b   £   ojPH.S02.fi                                                  03X1 

*3                                 <5                     ^s                                         H 

:                   x              :                        x 

o 

00 

■  a                          ,a                                                     ,  a 

-Og                                    -ag                      .                                                  -eg 

iii             is        3                  is 

to  <o§ 
w3 

So 

„,  0   J 

ota 

3                          a                13                               2 

*s 

:                     o              &                            : 

S  S                   g               ©                           P 
•  S                     S                S                              2 

02                                      tf                        «                                               O 

oj                                    oJ                       *»                                               " 
a                                  n                      u                                         " 

a05                      ~°°             So                           ~"<o 

o 
a 
■a 
a 

0) 

^fl 

"Is 

cJXl 
"o 

a 

01 

1.3  >/o  o3^jt3  a 

•*sg.«.sg§, 

««2-a&    2.2    „ 

a  a  g1"^  eJ  «j  £       ► 

3*111 Igg.S 

s               s 

-^  S  a  2         '•  a-O^J3  fe£  m^33 

aggo.il*-Sslsa:-S^sl 
IllJo-siaill^sig 

sl^^  gig  galls  3*1 

'3       3"  mS  0)^      ^       3*"«ail?£ 

l5  3o.|5»|-g^g|.33g3 

S-SS.sSSj^.ggg^^fljc 

2                            S 

pi 

go 

SI'S 

«3BJ 

94 


I* 


21 

£3 


a  s-5 

o  a" 

•o  a  Jf  S3 

55  §e 


SSgSs 
a  a  g  3  a 


o  S  CH 

» o  .2 

E  .  "s 

■°  £  Es  8 


V  0) 

a— a8 

a-* 

s5 

0]   M 

:                   :       :              :            h                   :            : 

■  0 

Mid- 
season 

Mid- 
season 

w 

■    c 

"21 

Si 

0) 

1  a 

•is 

...   OS 

as   a 


£2 


£2 


22 
o 


$*~i 


■a* -.a 


3 *>  S3 
<  Swa'Ci 


5  2  -.a-so.2 

ft  O  •<        fc.,M  3 
£  O  «u  3  O  o 

•"35  o  "la's  » 


11 


T3.S   g 

&8s 


fi^ll  lll'lll 


1 S  J  g.S 


sa 


IIS 

o 


i     if 


S5 


p  a  — 

O  H  m 

ag-a 

g3g 
2    - 


•S3    tt 
2  H 


^- 


►3        w§ 


6« 


ss 


Sfc 


» 


lilfillll 
*.s  swig's  8  s 

g   .  £Ji&0:S2!3 


■g  S  ° 


S«B 


g  gJi 

In'  V 

«-R.   . 


;  a  q  o> 
o   -.2 

*  a  a>-£.2>  o  oj-g 

K       f DOZok 

w  t~ -c  a  w  S  b 


i  B« 


:c  & 


;S;&«I 


^°  a^Tsa  £  w  _ 

S|  m3  §°  Ea  g£  §  «|j  £  >,  "=  &§  ^  u:5  £  °  a  2 

SI        Jis',Oj3iluS  >>  5?  M  i 

j  a  a .  -  -S  a 

OS  &  £ 


[  &  s  & 

o  a  o 

:KSS 

1  o  ° 

■an 

•  «  9  "  *; 

»j:ffl,2  a 


H^j.lb-sil^-i^aHi^  stasia 

S  2  2  2  2 


1-9 
a" 


£S 
^  o 

CG  O 


£a 
o  o 

*   3 


|«1 

■nuo 


•2og         i 


Ill 


X 

X 

X 

H 

« 

-3 

5 

►J 

S  » 

►j 

■  a 

si 

.  a 

si 

was 

a 

a 

5 
3 

•J 

v  c 

5 

s 

£ 

£ 

S 

Qa 

£ 

CQ 

< 

o 

< 

O 

o 

S 

o 

OS 

0 

o 

B 

0 

m 

CO 

a 

o 
6 

13 

-a  a 
03  " 

2°> 

Ooo 

ll 

a"4 

a 

o 

— 't- 
is 00 

300 

a"* 

da- 

33  8' 


so< 


B  c  a 


£-- 


8-aSS 

H§'§ 

era's 


h  i  S'as  c  3  S  i-  2  o*„C'5j;^ 

s  s  s 


J, 

j, 

J. 

<D 

3 

3 

*3 

T3 

T3 

T3 

> 

a 

a 

C 

o  _ 

c! 

« 

c 

a 

bi 

C 

a 

I 

|.i 

■m 

1 

"Sc 

3 

5 

o* 

o 

a 

a 

O 

t 
0 

M 

OS      "M 

ill     .1 

3-0 

bi 
o 

11 

CO 

I 
1 

Jjj  O  (D-O 

K  9 

3 

"3  «  g.-g  a 

9) 

s 

o 

o 

is 

32 

«  o 

.3 

'■SB 
o 

_:  o 

m  o 
_:  o 

^  S  M  ?  to 

3 

«** 

33 

33 

0) 

X 

« 

« 

X 

bO 

o 

^i| 

■  o 

Si 

£ 

•e| 

■  <3 

—  n 

h'sS 

ss 

W 

is 

*5  " 

SB 

_   3 
ffi 

co  a 

be 

>> 

•  S 

s 

3 

OS 

■"   3 

3^ 

|a 

M 

.MT3    fc 

^!T3  is 

3  to 

Q 

...     » 

ft 

a 

73 

■"  OS   >, 

"*  3 

q                    :                 :            :          : 

.; 

8 

a 

I  it 

-    1 

as 

a 
a 
a 

O 

o 

05  ►« 

a  o 

co|" 

-OS 

>> 

—to 

.2^ 

200 

CJOO 

a  oo 

a§ 

q~ 

H 

o~ 

« 

O 

o 
a 

r:  >>  is  «a 

3  o  £  ft 

2  a>  o  ft 

■A-S 

B 

«*   3 

H 

tf*3 

^3 

2sg"°ls§ 

■5  "  &     S  b  °  s 

23s5  a»no 
J2£>  ®'B  ft  a^>"o 
Ot?  >>9  *  o  o  o 

•a 

a 

Oj 

So 

'5  « 

3 

i 

in!  9 

»  »  a  „-g  £  0 
S'»  S3cO  3 

oH<!fti  >  « 

^  c 

6 

.T2  •    s8  5 

•ill  SZI 

0,0  ft     °.2C 

S  d^  > 

«feg8* 

>  eJ5.fi  s 

w  8 
a  £ 

St? 

T3—      .    fc 

►?  5  £  «■ 

>   UMf 

S 

s 

S 

s 

c 

(X 

ft 

-o  a 
I5 


h?>-z        -P 


O  M  5  o 

;£  -s£^ 

is  is-i 

SCO  ^m 


■  c 

■  <3 

o 

•a  Si 

^g 

ji? 

■aS 

•eg 

flg 

>> 

w 

h3 

§  «° 

S  « 

w 

S£ 

ss 

S£ 

w 

S  £ 

2 

>> 

>> 

s 

►3 

o 

M 

3 

.2* 

Is 

1 

-3 

^  to 

►3 

3 

■3 
1 

& 

0) 

T3 

a 

a 

s 

£ 

1 

S 

a 

0,a 

T3 

Q 

&< 

Q 

m 

Q 

• 

■ 

• 

.-  <D 

B% 

s 

s 

a 

S§ 

as 

S 

s 

£•§ 

£ 

tc 

« 

« 

« 

DQ 

QQ 

03 

0QT3 

assert 
nd  Me- 
hin, 
890 

ousse, 
895 

So 

a 

O00 
(BOO 

—  US 

MOO 

—  lO 

ace 

bSi/5 
~00 

3U 

§~ 

Q 

o 

>J 

O 

c 

O 

Q 

1  s'sl 


•  o« 


S"3     I 

2  &  B        9 


"3D 
SCO 


B  05  += 

■ft-»-gjg 


fl- 
ops 


5!S 

sal 


■SOB    ~h2' 


S  3g:     ' 

an  5. 

g 7a- a    < 


I- >,  a  3^.5  3  2=  5 


a  I  s  i  g-^  1  s  §  | J  |*i  S  s  fe  §  §  g^'J^I  <  a  g-3 « E3-3 1 J : 


£i 


•S^E 


a  Wg 


S3 


h3    ♦». 


■  3-g  S  2-o  a.2' 

S'gs-.Ns.-g 


H 

M 

x 

M 

i  p 

O 
02 

l 

<5~ 

>3 

w 

i3 

•eg 

■a      2     w " 
«  "  «;  8     &•* 


eg  S.        . u  >2  *"'  if 


fig 


Q        J 


•"c  £  |  °       :£~>>oa 

•   eg   >   g*3  si    .eg  OD-O   U  o 


£  m'S-r.2 

".eg  8-°' 


§"-2  «-3 


H 


si 


-I 


--2 


SO 


turn  heigh 
wer,  rathe 
habit.     V 
omer 

strong, 
e  bloomer 

ja  a 

as 

.2* 

lis 

led 

bio 
all, 
Fre 

-a  o 

•gs.2 

<-,             H 

r*. 

<5 

X 

:      x 

5 

Mid- 
season 

Mid- 
season 

i  G 

il 

i    H 

■a  8 

•-<  0) 

1) 

>  p 

ii 

Q" 

« 

Q 

*s 

£ 

E 

s 

Pm 

o 

< 

o 

pB| 

pq 

■3     ag 


SI 


E£ 


III 
a£2 


IS? 


Si-si 

gg-s 


3       O  Q  O. 


!lfcl||||l!Irtl|iMPl 

101 


Ho 


2  | 

W   3 


J4 

a>      a)' 


—  <u 

a  &5 

*V2 


:-So  a  o  j  ""<«     -£■*£•- 


a                .i 

<u 

•S                3 

«  H                TJ 

> 

o   _, 

1 

.2                   a] 
■§                        ^  hi 

la           1-9 

3 
O 

M 

a 

£ 

w  >> 

03 

o 

2  ta 

8.    - 

]j             1 

'I! 

J3  O 

•3  ° 

2 

n 

a  h  a>               k 

isa        a 

1*°     £3 

<5 

0) 

00  2  S 

£2 

X              X 

CD 

a 
o 

■  o 

■a  m 

t~    § 

—  rt 

CO 

1        SI 

*5  n 

"s  a 

a 

2                   a 

o8 

*3 

to  o  g 

H                   " 

^■3 

CQJ2 

»2                   <* 

s  1 

M 

o 

3"S 

*                    —  -iS 

iO^« 

,M 

OiC 

a 

o  « 

£ 

^ 

•*  .2 

:           m 

fa 

»-5 

o 

a 

.i 

CO     S 

o             8 

!{ 

«            o 

co 

<"    >-. 

"H 

3  5 

"S               fe 

N°£ 

8            I 

ih-TJ 

to                     i 

flg 

gS 

o 
a 
~o 
a 
a 

si 

w««s  §•*§.*  £"SS 

.<.a««S*&8.S     .8-3  jjl 

a  js  o)  a 

w  2  «     a)  8  a  °fc^    IS  c  "o 

g  3 1«  s|  sit  s  m 

P  Nil  III?6  8^ 

3  :S 

a 

03 

«  h  a  o  >>s 

& 

102 


EXTENDING  THE  PERIOD 
OF  BLOOM 


CHAPTER  IV 

EXTENDING   THE  PERIOD   OF  BLOOM 

THE  peony  is  sometimes  criticised  on  the 
ground  that  its  period  of  bloom  is  not  suffi- 
ciently long.  The  peony  does  not  have  the  char- 
acteristic of  other  perennials  such  as  the  larkspur, 
which,  after  being  cut  down,  blossoms  again  the 
same  season;  nor  does  it  bloom  as  continuously 
as  the  hybrid  tea  rose  does  under  favourable  con- 
ditions. But  the  dazzling  gorgeousness  of  the 
flower  is  more  than  compensation  for  its  compara- 
tively short  life. 

While  it  is  true  that  the  flowers  of  an  individ- 
ual variety  of  peony  will  last  only  a  number  of 
days,  it  is  also  true  that  by  making  a  judicious 
choice  of  different  species  and  varieties  it  is  easily 
possible  to  have  the  joy  of  peonies  in  one's  garden 
for  a  period  of  six  or  seven  weeks.  Moreover,  as 
the  peony  has  in  recent  years  become  the  sub- 
ject of  so  much  horticultural  and  commercial  in- 
terest, it  is  undoubtedly  only  a  matter  of  time 
before  the  scientific  plant  breeders,  by  the  em- 
ployment of  methods  of  selection  successfully 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

used  with  other  plants,  will  increase  the  sum  of 
our  happiness  by  lengthening  the  period  of  bloom 
still  further. 

In  addition  to  flowering  at  the  desired  time 
all  of  the  varieties  suggested  in  this  chapter  for 
the  purpose  of  extending  the  season  have  distinct 
and  attractive  qualities  of  their  own. 

The  following  list  gives  the  approximate  order 
of  bloom  of  the  different  kinds  of  peonies  desir- 
able for  the  garden.1  The  order,  of  course,  will 
vary  somewhat  on  account  of  different  conditions 
of  soil,  exposure  and  weather. 

( 1 )  P.  tenuifolia — with  fern-like  foliage. 

(2)  P.  Wittmaniana  and  Wittmaniana  hybrids — 

little  known  but  very  beautiful. 

(3)  P.  officinalis  (rubra  and  other  varieties) — the 

peony  of  our  grandmothers'  gardens. 

(4)  P.  suffruticosa  or  P.  moutan — the  tree  peony. 

(5)  P.  lutea — a  pure  yellow  species. 

(6)  P.  albiflora  or  sinensis — Chinese  peonies. 

Early  varieties. 
Midseason  varieties. 
Late  varieties. 

(1)  First  to  bloom  in  the  old-fashioned  gar- 
dens was  P.  tenuifolia,  known  in  England  as  the 

1  See  colour  plates  and  illustrations  in  this  and  the 
next  chapter  for  the  six  species  in  the  list. 
106 


P.   TENUIFOLIA 
The  earliest  species  of  peony  to  bloom 


EXTENDING  THE  PERIOD  OF  BLOOM 

Adonis  peony.  With  its  fragrant  flowers  of 
bright  blood-red,  and  its  deeply  cut  fern-like 
leaves,  resembling  somewhat  those  of  giant  fen- 
nel, it  is  thoroughly  in  harmony  with  the  other 
delicate  traceries  of  early  Spring.  This  graceful 
little  plant  which  attains  only  sixteen  or  eighteen 
inches  in  height,  still  has  a  strong  appeal,  but  is 
not  planted  in  the  modern  garden  as  frequently 
as  it  deserves  to  be.  A  few  weeks  after  blooming 
P.  tenuifolia  dies  down  to  the  ground  and  dis- 
appears until  the  following  Spring,  differing  in 
this  respect  from  the  other  species,  whose  foliage 
remains  and  helps  to  furnish  the  garden  all  Sum- 
mer. There  are  both  single  and  double  flowered 
varieties:  it  is  difficult  to  decide  which  is  the  more 
attractive. 

This  peony  is  a  native  of  the  Ukraine,  Russia, 
a  region  that  lies  north  of  the  Black  Sea.  It 
grows  in  profusion  there  and  on  the  hilly  grounds 
and  steep  banks  of  the  Terek  District  in  the  Cau- 
casus. The  first  mention  of  it  was  in  a  Euro- 
pean catalogue  published  in  1757.  It  is  thought 
to  have  been  introduced  into  England  by  William 
Malcolm  in  1765. 

(2)   The  season  of  P.  tenuifolia  is  closely  f ol- 


io? 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

lowed  by  that  of  the  Wittmaniana  hybrids  which 
bloom  early  in  May,  nearly  a  month  ahead  of  the 
Chinese  varieties.  The  original  Wittmaniana 
species  was  probably  named  after  Wittman,  a 
botanist  who  travelled  in  the  Caucasus.  The 
details  of  its  introduction  are  shrouded  in  mys- 
tery, a  fact  which  is  the  more  remarkable  be- 
cause of  the  novel  colour  of  the  flower — yellow. 
It  is  first  mentioned  in  the  Journal  of  Botany 
(London),  for  1842,  where  a  letter  is  quoted 
which  shows  that,  together  with  other  rare  plants, 
it  had  been  received  in  a  garden  in  the  Crimea, 
from  Count  Worontzoff  in  Adsharia,  not  far  from 
Erzerum.  Subsequently  this  species  was  lost  for 
a  number  of  years,  but  was  rediscovered  about 
1880  in  an  obscure  Irish  garden.  The  suggestion 
has  been  made  that  the  American  Peony  Society 
commission  some  horticultural  Arsene  Lupin  to 
unravel  the  mysteries  of  Wittmaniana's  appear- 
ance, disappearance  and  re-appearance. 

The  flower  is  single  with  large  firm  petals  of 
a  colour  well  described  as  "  light  primrose  with 
a  dash  of  lemon."  The  seeds  are  a  bright  coral 
red.  This  type  species  is  not  grown  here  very 
successfully ;  for  some  inexplicable  reason  it  often 
dies  out. 

108 


LE  PRINTEM 
(Wittmaniana  Hybrid — Lemoine,  1907) 
Single  type.     Pale  creamy  yellow.     Blooms  early  in  May.     Excellent  for  cutting 


EXTENDING  THE  PERIOD  OF  BLOOM 

The  Wittmaniana  hybrids,  however,  are  very 
hardy.  M.  Lemoine,  the  French  hybridist,  by 
making  crosses  of  various  Chinese  varieties  on 
P.  Wittmaniana  has  produced  these  valuable  ex- 
tra early-flowering  sorts.  They  have  large  fra- 
grant single  flowers  of  great  beauty,  in  delicate 
tints  of  white,  yellow,  rose  and  salmon,  and  have 
thick  leaves  of  vigorous  and  luxuriant  growth. 
Avante  Garde,  palest  rose;  Le  Printemps,  yel- 
lowish cream ;  Mai  Fleuri,  salmon  white,  and  Mes- 
sagere,  sulphur  white,  are  all  most  attractive. 

P.  Wittmaniana  has  also  been  crossed  with 
P.  Russi  by  Lemoine,  thereby  producing  Russi 
major  which,  while  very  early-flowering,  has  a 
mauve  colouring  not  always  acceptable. 

A  seedling  of  P.  Wittmaniana  put  out  by 
Barr,  in  England,  bears  a  single  flower  of  soft 
rose  and  yellow  tints  (P.  Wittmaniana  rosea) . 

(3)  The  bloom  of  the  Wittmaniana  hybrids 
is  succeeded  by  that  of  P.  officinalis,  so  named 
because  in  the  early  days  its  roots  were  used  for 
medicinal  purposes.  The  variety  rubra  plena 
(double  red)  is  the  peony  so  common  in  the  old- 
time  gardens:  in  fact,  up  to  about  1850  this  was 
the  only  peony  grown  to  any  great  extent  in  this 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

country.  Its  large  size  and  persistent  growth, 
the  vivid  red  colour  of  its  blooms  and  its  notice- 
ably unpleasant  odour  all  serve  to  impress  its  per- 
sonality on  the  observer.  For  sentimental  reasons 
and  because  it  is  one  of  the  parents  of  some  of 
the  wonderfully  beautiful  peonies  of  to-day,  this 
peony  is  entitled  to  a  place  in  every  garden. 

Besides  this  old  red  "  piney  "  there  are  several 
other  fine  kinds  of  the  officinalis  species  that  are 
deserving  of  selection.  Four  particularly  striking 
varieties  are  easily  obtainable  and  share  with  the 
rubra  plena  the  merit  of  blooming  in  May.  They 
are: 

P.  officinalis  alba  plena,  which  has  double  white 
flowers.  The  buds  are  pink  when  they  ap- 
pear, but  fade  to  white  as  the  flower  opens. 

P.  officinalis  rosea  plena,  which  has  f  ull  flowers 
of  bright  rose. 

P.  officinalis  lobata.2  This  peony  has  single 
flowers  of  an  unusual  colour — a  glorious 
orange  scarlet. 

P.  officinalis  la  negresse,  which  has  full,  double, 
rich,  dark  maroon  blooms. 

2  At  the  present  time  an  animated  controversy  is 
going  on  in  England  as  to  the  proper  classification  of 
lobata.  There  is  no  controversy  as  to  the  beauty  of  the 
flower, 

110 


P.  OFFICINALIS 
The  old  red  "piney"  of  our  grandmothers'  garde 


EXTENDING  THE  PERIOD  OF  BLOOM 

(4)  Next  in  point  of  flowering  come  the  tree 
peonies.  These  have  as  ancestors  a  primitive 
Chinese  species,  P.  suffruticosa  or  P.  moutan,  and 
are  distinguished  from  the  herbaceous  peony  in 
having  a  shrub-like  habit  and  a  permanent  woody 
growth  that  does  not  die  down  to  the  ground  in 
the  Autumn.  This  type  has  been  cherished  and 
cultivated  in  China  and  Japan  for  hundreds  of 
years,  and  has,  since  1787,  received  much  atten- 
tion in  Europe — particularly  in  England.  In 
many  places  in  England,  however,  it  is  grown 
with  but  indifferent  success,  which  is  due  possibly 
to  the  climate  or  to  local  conditions.  It  does  bet- 
ter in  eastern  America,  where  the  climate — es- 
pecially of  the  Atlantic  Coast  slope  of  the  United 
States — is  similar  to  that  of  interior  China,  its 
original  habitat.  The  tree  peony  usually  reaches 
a  height  of  three  or  four  feet.  There  is  an  in- 
stance of  one  in  England  twelve  feet  high  and 
thirty-six  feet  in  circumference  which  never  failed 
for  twenty-five  years  to  produce  annually  several 
hundred  blooms.  The  flowers  of  P.  moutan  are 
remarkable  for  their  beauty  of  form,  texture  and 
colour  combined ;  they  are  also  very  large — often 
measuring  from  seven  to  ten  inches  across — and 
111 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

have  a  satisfactory  way  of  lasting  long  on  the 
plants.  One  is  surprised  that  this  species  is  not 
more  appreciated  and  frequently  planted.  The 
history  of  the  tree  peony  and  some  of  the  points 
to  be  remembered  in  its  culture  are  set  out  in 
Chapters  IX  and  X.  Among  the  many  fine 
varieties  grown  to-day  there  are  at  least  four  so 
exquisite  that  they  should  be  in  every  peony  lover's 
garden: 

Cakoline  d'Italie,  which  has  finely  formed 
flowers  of  silvery  flesh  colour,  with  a  reflex  of 
salmon. 

Mme.  Stuart-Low,  which  has  cup-shaped 
flowers  of  bright  salmon  red  with  broad  silvery 
border  and  golden  stamens.  The  flowers  are  of 
exceptional  brilliance  and  the  plant  blooms 
luxuriantly. 

Blanche  de  Chateau  Futu,  which  has  flow- 
ers of  pure  white  with  carmine  spots.  This  is 
also  a  free  bloomer. 

Reine  Elizabeth  is  considered  the  finest  of 
all  the  tree  peonies.  The  flowers  are  massive — 
salmon  pink  with  brilliant  copper  tints.  The  plant 
is  a  vigorous  grower  and  free  bloomer. 

(5)  After  P.  moutan  comes  the  bloom  of  P. 
112 


EXTENDING  THE  PERIOD  OF  BLOOM 

lutea.  This  species,  usually  classed  among  the 
tree  peonies  on  account  of  its  woody  stems,  has 
thick,  deeply  lobed  dark-green  leaves  and  cup- 
shaped  single  flowers,  measuring  about  three  and 
one-half  inches  across,  with  waxy  fleshy  petals 
of  a  wonderful  golden  yellow,  strong  and  pure. 
In  some  of  the  blooms  the  lower  half  of  the  fila- 
ments is  red,  giving  the  effect  of  a  red  ring  in 
the  centre  of  the  flower.  Curiously  the  leaves  are 
of  the  same  outline  and  habit  of  growth  as  those 
of  the  tree  peony,  while  the  buds  are  of  the  same 
shape  as  those  of  the  herbaceous  peony.  In  addi- 
tion to  its  beauty  this  little  peony  is  gifted  with 
fragrance,  somewhat  like  that  of  a  lily. 

Thirty  years  ago  Abbe  Delavay — a  mission- 
ary— discovered  P.  lutea  in  the  Yunnan  Moun- 
tains in  southern  China,  and  sent  twenty-six  seeds 
marked  "  Seed  of  an  Alpine  plant  "  to  the  Jardin 
des  Plantes  in  Paris.  Only  three  of  the  twenty- 
six  seeds  lived,  but  from  them  are  descended  all 
the  P.  lutea  now  in  cultivation.  From  France 
this  peony  was  introduced  into  England  and 
thence  to  this  country. 

Two  recent  hybrids  of  P.  lutea  and  P.  moutan 
offer  much  of  interest  and  beauty,  though  not 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

as  early  flowering  as  either  parent.  P.  L'Esper- 
ance,  introduced  in  1909  by  Lemoine,  is  similar 
to  P.  moutan  in  foliage  and  habit,  and  has  single 
flowers  eight  inches  across  with  eight  or  ten  broad- 
fringed  petals,  in  colour  soft  yellow  tinged  with 
buff  and  splashed  at  the  base  with  red.  P.  La 
Lorraine,  sent  out  in  1912,  also  by  Lemoine,  has 
a  very  full  globular  bloom,  about  six  inches  across, 
regular  in  outline  and  of  a  buff  tone  passing  to 
golden  yellow.  It  gained  high  honours  in  France 
and  was  awarded  the  First  Class  Certificate — a 
recognition  of  great  merit — by  the  English  Royal 
Horticultural  Society  in  1912.  It  was  one  of  the 
most  startling  novelties  introduced  into  England 
in  that  year.  This  variety  is  not  offered  as  yet 
in  this  country. 

(6)  The  last  to  bloom  and  most  glorious  of 
all  the  peonies  is  P.  albiflora.  It  is  this  peony 
to  which  reference  is  usually  made  to-day  under 
the  generic  term  "  peony."  Nearly  all  of  the  five 
hundred  or  more  named  double  varieties  of  albi- 
flora have  been  obtained  by  crossing  P.  albiflora 
(mostly  single)  with  P.  officinalis,  peregrina  and 
other  species.  This  crossing  which  produced  a 
wide  range  of  colour  and  form  has  been  the  means 

114 


EXTENDING  THE  PERIOD  OF  BLOOM 

of  lengthening  the  blooming  season  for  the  im- 
proved species,  the  result  of  the  union.  Many  of 
the  best  varieties  of  P.  albiflora  have  been  given 
in  Chapter  III.  In  order  to  complete  the  plan 
of  having  peonies  in  flower  in  the  garden  for  the 
longest  possible  time,  a  few  of  the  earliest,  mid- 
season  and  latest  varieties  are  here  named  again. 


Early. 


Late. 


Umbellata  Rosea  white 

Festiva  Maxima  white 

Madame  Ducel  pink 

Mons.  Jules  Elie  pink 

Adolphe  Rousseau  red 


Midseason .  .  , 


Avalanche  white 

Marie  Jacquin  white 

Madame  Lemonier  pink 

Gloire  de  Chas.  Gombault  pink  and  yellow 
Mons.  Martin  Cahuzac     red 


Marie  Lemoine 

white 

Baroness  Schroeder 

white 

Pierre    Duchartre 

pink 

Livingstone 

pink 

Rubra  Superba 

red 

115 


PURCHASING 


CHAPTER  V 

PURCHASING 

UNLESS  the  admirer  of  peonies,  who  longs 
impatiently  for  exquisite  flowers  of  his  own, 
has  the  good  fortune  to  be  tutored  by  a  disin- 
terested authority,  he  is  on  the  road  to  enroll- 
ment in  the  expensive  school  of  experience — ex- 
pensive to  a  varying  degree  in  money,  and  ex- 
pensive to  a  certain  degree  in  time  and  results. 
Many  varieties  of  the  peonies  take  two  to  four 
or  even  in  some  cases  five  years  to  become  so 
well  established  as  to  give  the  most  typical  blooms. 
The  owner  inevitably  feels  resentment  on  ulti- 
mately finding,  after  an  extended  period  of  care 
and  anticipation,  that  the  flower  is  of  inferior 
quality,  that  it  is  different  from  what  was  ordered, 
or  that  possibly  the  plant  is  a  shy  bloomer 
or  does  not  bloom  at  all.  For  months  and  years 
to  slip  by  without  bringing  the  development  one 
has  a  right  to  expect  is  both  disappointing  and 
disheartening.  As  I  look  back  to  my  early  un- 
guided  efforts  to  have  "  lots  of  lovely  peonies," 
the  memory  of  time-consuming  mistakes  I  made, 
which  might  have  been  avoided  had  I  but  had 
advice,  encourages  me  to  try  to  help  others. 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

Successful  purchasing  of  peonies,  as  of  most 
things,  resolves  itself  into  three  factors — knowing 
quality  and  prices,  knowing  where  to  get  the  best 
and  knowing  what  one  wants.  In  other  words, 
the  buyer  of  peonies  who  desires  the  satisfaction 
of  feeling  that  he  has  used  good  judgment,  must 
study  (1)  the  difference  between  good  and  bad 
stock;  (2)  the  individuals  and  firms  in  the  peony 
business  and  what  they  offer,  and  (3)  his  own 
taste  and  requirements. 

Catalogues 
While  it  is  often  enthralling  and  always  en- 
lightening to  secure  catalogues  from  a  number 
of  growers  and  dealers  and  to  compare  the  lists, 
both  of  varieties  and  prices,  it  must  be  remem- 
bered that  the  beauty  of  the  printed  matter  does 
not  always  necessarily  correspond  with  the  qual- 
ity of  the  plants  offered.  Advertising  is  a  branch 
of  any  business  which  is  artistically  or  carelessly 
done,  as  its  importance  is  or  is  not  recognised  by 
the  advertiser.  But  neither  the  beauty  nor  the 
simplicity  of  the  printed  matter  affects  the  vary- 
ing margin  between  euphemism  and  accuracy. 
The    general    reputation    for    integrity    of    the 

120 


PURCHASING 

grower  or  dealer  putting  out  the  catalogue  is  an 
all-important  matter  about  which  inquiry  should 
be  made. 

Peony  growers'  booklets  contain  much  valu- 
able information,  but  they  are  sometimes  mislead- 
ing. The  fascination  of  the  printed  word  seems 
never  to  be  so  strong  as  in  flower  catalogues.  The 
ingenuousness  with  which  one  peruses  and  accepts 
all  of  these  that  come  to  hand  each  year  is  un- 
deniable proof  of  the  vernal  and  eternal  charac- 
teristic of  hope.  While  catalogue  reading  is  prac- 
tically unexcelled  as  a  form  of  indoor  agricultural 
and  horticultural  diversion,  I  fear  that  it  is  some- 
what dangerous  to  the  happiness  if  not  to  the  life 
or  liberty  of  the  novice.  The  extravagant  use  of 
"  the  best,"  "  superb,"  "  splendid,"  "  magnifi- 
cent," "  indispensable  "  and  other  ecstatic  adjec- 
tives at  times  thrills  even  a  hardened  buyer,  but 
to  the  beginner,  sensitive  to  suggestion,  it  is  often 
positively  hypnotic.  I  would  not  for  a  moment 
intimate  that  this  is  wilful  misrepresentation:  it 
does  not  seem,  however,  always  to  be  the  whole 
truth.  A  peony  may  be  veraciously  described  as 
so  appealingly  beautiful  that  one's  hand  at  once 
reaches  for  the  order  form.    But  before  indulging 

121 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

the  impulse  and  filling  in  the  blanks,  important 
questions  should  be  asked  and  satisfactorily 
answered : 

1.  Is  the  coveted  peony  a  free  bloomer? 

£.  Are  the  stems  strong? 

S.  Is  its  odour  agreeable? 

4.  Is  it  better  for  cutting  or  for  landscape? 

5.  Is  it  the  proper  height  for  the  place  where  it 

is  to  be  planted? 

And  after  all  these  points  are  disposed  of,  others  arise : 

6.  Will  the  stock  described  in  the  catalogue  be 

as  represented? 

7.  Will  the  roots  be  strong  and  healthy? 

8.  Will  they  be  true  to  name? 

9.  What  is  the  grower's  or  dealer's  reputation  as 

to  reliability? 

First  Hand  Information  and  Disinterested 
Advice 
The  ideal  way  to  choose  peonies  is  to  visit 
several  nurseries  and  make  selections  of  plants 
when  in  bloom.  Of  the  hundreds  of  varieties 
of  peonies,  the  average  general  nursery  carries 
in  stock  only  a  comparatively  small  number. 
The  growers  of  peonies  exclusively,  or  of  peonies 
in  connection  with  a  few  other  perennials, 
usually  put  out  long  lists  of  the  finest  kinds.    In 

122 


GLOIRE  DE  CHAS.  GOMBAULT 

(Gonibault,  1866) 

Crown  type.    Colouring  and  form  of  great  charm.    A  moderate  sized  peony  which  blooms  freely 


MADAME  LEMONIER 

(Calot,  I860) 

Rose  type.     Full  flower  of  pale  pink.     The  petals  are  unusually  large  and  glossy 


PURCHASING 

order  to  make  comparisons  of  the  habit  of  growth 
and  the  quality  of  stock,  as  well  as  to  enlarge  one's 
acquaintance  with  the  flowers  of  the  different  vari- 
eties, it  will  be  of  advantage  for  one  to  visit  a 
number  of  nurseries,  whether  the  lists  of  peonies 
offered  for  sale  are  large  or  small. 

A  convincing  reason  for  seeing  the  flowers  in 
bloom  before  ordering  is  the  fact  that  probably 
no  words  in  the  English  language  convey  so  many 
shades  of  meaning  as  those  expressing  shades  of 
colour.  When  one  reads  in  a  catalogue  that  a  cer- 
tain flower  is  "  Tyrian  rose  "  or  "  Bengal  rose  " 
or  "  Solferino  red,"  unless  one  possesses  a  colour 
chart,  or  is  familiar  with  the  terminology  of  the 
peony  trade,  or  has  perhaps  the  good  fortune  to 
have  lived  in  Tyre,  Bengal  or  Solferino,  as  the 
case  may  be,  the  description  will  probably  be  un- 
intelligible. How  many  beginners  go  to  the  dic- 
tionary to  find  that "  amaranth  "  is  "  a  name  given 
to  mixtures  of  colouring  matters  of  which  the  chief 
constituent  is  magenta  "  ?  Most  of  us,  I  fear,  learn 
the  definition  through  experience  when  the  flower 
appears.  One  may,  of  course,  like  magenta:  but 
if  a  bluish  pink,  or  purplish  red  bring  tears  to  the 
eyes  of  others  as  they  do  to  mine,  it  is  no  laughing 
matter  to  own  an  amaranth  peony. 

123 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

Visits  to  peony  exhibitions  will  also  prove  in- 
valuable in  giving  the  opportunity  to  compare 
colours  and  to  determine  those  one  likes  best. 
Furthermore,  at  exhibitions  one  can  readily  and 
delightfully  become  acquainted  with  names  of 
varieties  and  types  of  form. 

In  addition  to  seeing  the  nurseries  of  com- 
mercial growers  and  studying  exhibitions,  still 
another  important  source  of  aid  lies  in  viewing 
private  collections.  The  gardening  spirit  usually 
prompts  the  owners  to  extend  assistance  to  other 
flower  lovers,  so  that  disinterested  information  is 
easily  available.  Even  in  a  small  garden  con- 
taining a  few  cherished  peonies,  much  help  may 
be  obtained.  I  give  here  a  list  of  questions  to 
ask  of  one's  indulgent  friends,  the  answers  to 
which  it  will  be  of  benefit  to  have  and  consider 
before  buying. 

1.  Where  and  when  were  the  roots  purchased? 

2.  How  old  were  they  when  they  were  bought  ? 

3.  How  large  were  they,  and  did  they  have  fat  eyes  ? 

4.  Did  they  bloom  the  first  year  after  planting? 

5.  If  not,  how  many  years  passed  before  they 

bloomed? 

6.  Have  they  been  transplanted? 

7.  Have  they  been  divided? 

8.  Was  the  stock  clean  and  healthy? 

124 


MADAME  CALOT 

(Miellez,  1856) 

Rose  type.     A  high-class  and  inexpensive  light  pink  peony.    It  is  strong-growing,  free-blooming 
and  fragrant 


PURCHASING 

One  should  always  note  under  what  conditions 
of  soil  and  location  the  peonies  are  planted,  and 
in  drawing  conclusions  one  should  be  fair  to  both 
grower  and  owner. 

In  the  Autumn,  in  the  digging  and  shipping 
season,  visits  to  nurseries  are  also  instructive. 
One  then  finds  out  in  a  general  way  what  each 
grower  gives  in  return  for  the  prices  asked  in 
his  catalogue.  The  size  and  quality  of  roots  sent 
out  by  growers  vary  greatly:  the  blooms  from 
the  roots  will  show  a  corresponding  difference. 
Some  growers  list  and  advertise  one-,  two-  and 
three-year  roots.  Others  quote  a  single  price  and 
say  nothing  about  the  age  or  size  of  the  roots.  In 
the  latter  case  one  buys  in  ignorance  and  on  faith : 
in  addition,  one's  mind  is  so  occupied  with  pictures 
of  the  glorious  flower  described  that  little  thought 
is  given  the  roots  except  as  to  the  number  required. 

Prices 
In  buying  peonies,  low  prices  alone  should  not 
influence  the  purchaser.  A  root  of  some  standard 
variety  such  as  Festiva  maxima  may  be  bought 
from  some  growers  as  low  as  thirty-five  cents, 
whereas  the  same  variety,  listed  as  being  the  same 

125 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

age,  bought  from  others  will  cost  as  much  as  sixty 
cents.  The  plants  listed  may  both  be  true  to 
name,  but  there  are  probably  differences  in  the 
quality  of  the  root  which  determine  the  price. 
X's  root  at  sixty  cents  will  begin  to  bloom  pos- 
sibly the  first  season,  and  surely  the  second  season 
after  planting,  whereas  Y's  cheaper  root  may 
and  probably  will  not  be  vigorous  enough  to  bloom 
until  the  third  or  fourth  year.  And  there  is  no 
certainty  that  it  will  be  a  fine  strong  flower  when 
it  does  appear  at  last. 

Three  experiences  recounted  from  notes  in  my 
garden  book  may  be  of  interest  from  several 
angles. 

1.  Some  years  ago  I  bought  from  a  general 
nurseryman  and  seedsman  a  dozen  peony  roots  of 
standard  varieties.  As  his  roses  and  seeds  had 
been  most  satisfactory,  I  ordered  peonies  from 
his  catalogue  without  further  thought.  Two  years 
after  planting  only  one  flower  bloomed  on  each 
of  two  of  the  plants.  At  the  end  of  three  years 
these  same  two  plants  bore  several  flowers  apiece. 
At  the  end  of  four  years  the  remaining  ten  roots, 
which  had  not  produced  a  solitary  bloom  in  all 
this  time,  were  pulled  up,  examined  and  destroyed. 

126 


PURCHASING 

The  roots  were  not  diseased  but  were  small  and 
weak:  in  fact  during  the  four  years  that  they 
had  been  in  my  garden  they  had  not  noticeably 
increased  in  size.  Evidently  the  stock  had  been 
divided  too  often  and  into  too  small  pieces,  and 
the  roots  had  not  been  able  to  recover  their 
strength. 

2.  On  another  purchase  of  fourteen  roots, 
which  was  made  from  a  grower  of  peonies,  I  had 
a  most  disappointing  experience.  As  this  grower 
strongly  advocated  mulching  with  manure,  I  con- 
scientiously proceeded  to  mulch  as  directed.  This 
caused  two  of  the  roots  to  rot  away  during  the 
first  winter.  At  the  end  of  one  year  only  one 
flower  appeared  on  the  remaining  twelve  plants. 
At  the  end  of  two  years,  four  plants,  supposedly 
of  one  variety,  bloomed  well,  but  one  of  the 
four  was  not  true  to  name.  The  other  plants  had 
one  flower  apiece,  but  have  refused  to  bloom  even 
thus  luxuriantly  since  then.  At  the  end  of  three 
years  three  more  plants  decided  to  blossom  in  a 
half-hearted  way,  and  two  others  did  creditably. 
In  other  words,  after  four  years'  waiting  only  five 
plants  out  of  fourteen  proved  to  be  satisfactory. 

3.  The  third  experience  makes  more  cheerful 

127 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 
reading.  From  another  grower  of  peonies,  I  se- 
cured a  shipment  of  exceptionally  fine  roots.  The 
first  year  after  planting  seventy-five  per  cent,  of 
these  bloomed:  some  of  the  plants  bore  six  or 
eight  flowers.  The  second  year  all  except  one 
bloomed  freely  and  had  sturdy  flowers  and  strong 
lustrous  foliage.  The  prices  for  these  roots  were 
higher  than  those  of  certain  other  growers  and 
nurserymen,  but  the  results  warranted  the  added 
expense.  I  have  just  come  in  from  the  garden 
this  warm  May  morning  after  having  counted 
with  a  miser's  thrills  of  joy  the  many  large,  vigor- 
ous buds  on  plants  furnished  only  last  year  by  the 
same  man.    May  he  live  long  and  prosper! 

The  newest  and  scarcest  peonies  command  a 
fancy  price.  The  wise  beginner  will  leave  the  buy- 
ing of  these  varieties  until  he  has  had  either  ample 
experience  or  specific  expert  advice.  Some  of 
them  are  wonderfully  beautiful  and  desirable, 
and  others  are  expensive  because  there  are  only 
a  small  number  on  the  market,  not  necessarily 
because  they  are  greatly  superior  to  the  well- 
known  kinds  which  should  be  in  every  peony 
garden. 

128 


ALICE  DE  JULVECOURT 
(Pele,  1857) 
Crown  type.      A  well-built  full  flower  of  delicate  rose  blush  and 


PURCHASING 

Quality  is  more  important  than  quantity.  It 
is  far  cheaper  in  the  end  to  purchase  roots  of  finest 
quality  and  after  several  years  propagate  them 
than  to  buy  cheap  roots  which  may  be  poor  stock 
and  possibly  not  true  to  name.  In  the  first  in- 
stance one  has  roots  of  ever-increasing  value:  in 
the  second,  after  a  few  years  of  disappointment 
the  roots  will  probably  be  thrown  away,  entailing 
a  loss  of  time  which,  in  peony  growing,  is  of  even 
more  importance  than  money. 

The  ever-widening  interest  in  the  peony,  and 
a  consequently  large  demand  for  it,  together  with 
the  fact  that  the  peony  increases  slowly,  will  prob- 
ably cause  the  inevitable  law  of  supply  and  de- 
mand to  keep  up  the  prices  of  the  standard 
varieties. 

Points  to  be  Decided 

The  decision  as  to  where  to  buy  may  be  arrived 
at  in  one  of  several  ways.  It  may  be  the  result 
of  observation  during  visits  to  various  nurseries 
and  gardens,  or  it  may  be  made  on  the  advice  of 
experienced  friends,  or,  in  the  event  that  observa- 
tion and  advice  are  not  available,  a  conclusion 
may  be  reached  by  doing  a  little  experimental 
buying.    Roots  can  be  obtained  from  each  of  sev- 

9  129 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

eral  nurseries,  and  comparisons  of  their  quality 
carefully  made.  In  Chapter  VIII  on  Propaga- 
tion and  in  Appendix  B,  will  be  found  pictures 
and  descriptions  of  both  healthy  and  sick  roots, 
which  will  be  of  assistance  in  forming  a  judgment 
on  the  quality  and  condition  of  stock. 

Having  decided  where  the  roots  are  to  be 
bought,  the  next  step  in  purchasing  is  to  deter- 
mine for  what  use  the  peonies  are  wanted.  If 
they  are  to  be  planted  for  landscape  effects  the 
best  for  the  purpose  are  the  varieties  in  white, 
strong  pink  and  red,  which  colours  have  the  ad- 
vantage of  fading  less  in  the  sun.  If  the  peonies 
are  for  the  garden,  varieties  in  any  colours  may 
be  chosen.  If  the  flowers  are  to  be  used  largely 
for  cutting,  those  that  are  best  suited  for  that 
purpose  should  be  selected.  For  planting  in 
mixed  borders  the  colours  of  the  other  perennials 
in  bloom  at  the  same  time  should  be  remembered. 
Edulis  superba — pink — and  scarlet  Oriental  pop- 
pies make  a  clash  which  can  be  heard  for  miles! 
All  these  considerations  enable  one  to  make  a 
choice  not  to  be  regretted  or  reversed,  a  procedure 
which  is  usually  disturbing  to  one's  mind  and 
purse  as  well  as  to  the  peonies  themselves. 


PURCHASING 

The  number  of  peonies  required  should  receive 
careful  attention  from  the  novice.  For  one's  first 
purchase,  the  smallest  number  with  which  one  can 
possibly  manage  to  exist  is  best.  Make  haste 
slowly  in  collecting:  it  is  likely  to  be  less  expen- 
sive and  it  is  a  good  deal  more  amusing.  Two  or 
three  years'  experience  will  bless  one  with  an 
amazing  amount  of  wisdom,  and  there  will  prob- 
ably be  a  warm  feeling  of  self-gratulation  later 
at  the  restraint  exercised. 

As  orders  are  filed  and  filled  in  the  sequence 
in  which  they  are  received  at  the  nursery,  the 
earlier  the  order  is  completed  and  sent  the  better. 
When  the  order  is  forwarded  it  is  well  to  ask 
whether  the  varieties  specified  can  be  furnished 
in  the  quantities  and  ages  desired.  If  some  vari- 
eties cannot  be  supplied,  the  plan  of  planting 
may  be  rearranged  or  the  order  for  them  placed 
elsewhere.  State  in  the  order  the  date  on  which 
shipment  is  to  go  forward,  and  request  a  notice  of 
the  shipment  before  it  is  dispatched,  so  that  ar- 
rangements can  be  made  for  being  at  home  at  the 
time  of  planting :  even  the  most  trusted  gardeners 
sometimes  make  mistakes.  If  one  cares  at  all  for 
peonies  their  arrival,  unpacking  and  planting  will 
be  both  a  rite  and  a  festival. 

131 


WHERE  TO  PLANT  AND 

HOW  TO  PREPARE  THE 

SOIL 


CHAPTER  VI 

WHERE  TO  PLANT  AND  HOW  TO  PREPARE  THE 
SOIL 

The  Peony  in  Landscape  Work 

FROM  the  appreciation  of  the  beauty  of  the 
peony  as  an  individual  flower  it  is  but  a  step 
to  the  realisation  of  its  value  in  landscape  work. 
The  whole  effect  of  peonies  may  be  described  as 
enlivening:  their  natural  "  air  of  gaiety,"  as  one 
writer  aptly  calls  it,  is  a  charm  quite  by  itself, 
distinctly  in  addition  to  their  artistic  appearance 
and  is  present  whether  they  are  arranged  in  large 
groups  or  in  small  plantings. 

A  striking  picture  can  be  obtained  by  massing 
peonies  in  lawns  or  open  fields,  or  at  a  distance 
with  a  background  of  trees.  As  an  example  of 
the  first  method  of  treatment,  the  peonies  in  broad 
curving  beds  at  Highland  Park,  Rochester,  make 
an  admirable  composition.  Another  instance  of 
this  plan  is  on  the  estate  of  Miss  Morris  (near 
Philadelphia) ,  where  a  gleaming  ribbon  of  peonies 
separated  by  a  strip  of  turf  follows  the  outlines 
of  a  long  bed  of  shrubbery. 

Peonies  are  well  planted  in  front  of  but  a  little 

135 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

way  from  shrubs  or  evergreens  such  as  yews  or 
cedars,  which  not  only  bring  out  the  bright  colour- 
ings of  the  blooms  but  also  serve  as  a  shelter. 
At  the  Royal  Gardens,  Kew,  England,  peonies 
have  been  successfully  used  as  a  setting  for  the 
smaller  flowers  in  the  rock  garden.  Unless  one's 
purpose  is  to  make  a  collection  of  peonies  for  com- 
parison or  exhibition,  a  limited  space  should  not 
include  a  large  number  of  varieties  differing  in 
colour  or  time  of  bloom. 

Peonies  placed  in  lines  at  the  edge  of  walks 
or  drives  give  a  pleasing  finish.  In  the  border 
they  are  valuable  both  for  their  ornamental  foli- 
age and  for  their  brilliancy  when  in  flower.  In  a 
formal  garden  they  are  a  great  aid  in  accenting 
the  plan :  even  a  few  specimens  may  be  used  with 
marked  results.  In  my  own  garden,  the  plant- 
ing of  individual  peonies  at  all  intersections  of 
the  brick  walks  emphasises  the  design  not  only 
when  the  plants  are  in  bloom,  but,  because  of  the 
boldness  of  the  leaves,  throughout  the  entire  sea- 
son. And  the  contrast  of  the  stately  white  Festiva 
maxima  against  the  deep  green  of  Chinese  cedars 
gives  me  a  picture  eagerly  awaited  every  year  and 
long  remembered  with  delight. 


PEONIES  IN  LANDSCAPE  PLANTING  ON  MISS  MORRIS'S  ESTATE  NEAR  PHILADELPHIA 


WHERE  TO  PLANT 

A  garden  devoted  exclusively  to  peonies,  or 
to  peonies  and  some  other  early  summer  peren- 
nials, is  the  height  of  simplicity  and  beauty.  Such 
a  garden  also  has  the  advantages  of  being  easily 
planned  and  of  being  at  its  best  when  most  proud 
garden  owners  are  at  home.  A  planting  of  peo- 
nies, both  herbaceous  and  tree  (selected  for  a 
succession  of  bloom),  combined  with  iris  (also 
selected  for  succession),  lilies  of  the  valley  and 
lilacs,  gives  flowers  that  need  little  care  and  pro- 
vides both  perfume  and  splendour  in  soul-satis- 
fying quantities. 

The  requirements  for  peonies  for  mass  effects 
are  white  or  strong  colours  so  as  to  fade  the  least, 
and  low  price  so  as  not  to  bankrupt  the  purchaser. 
Umbellata  rosea  and  Duchesse  de  Nemours, 
both  white,  Rubra  triumphans  and  De  Candolle, 
both  red,  and  Edulis  superba,  deep  pink,  fill  these 
needs  and  are  readily  obtainable  in  quantities. 
For  wild  planting,  P.  officinalis — red  and  reason- 
able— lends  itself  gracefully:  after  becoming  es- 
tablished it  takes  care  of  itself  for  many  years. 
A  group  placed  beyond,  but  visible  from,  the  con- 
fines of  the  garden,  makes  a  dazzling  effect. 

"  Outside  "  planting,  so  successfully  employed 

137 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

in  connection  with  many  noted  gardens,  always 
adds  greatly  to  the  picture.  A  faultless  garden 
should  have  an  enticing  view  as  well  looking  out 
from  as  looking  into  it.  This  can  be  obtained  in 
several  ways — for  example,  by  planting  shrubs 
and  trees  in  the  distance  to  secure  a  good  skyline 
or  by  growing  large  fields  of  bright-coloured  flow- 
ers to  create  the  impression  that  the  world  is 
all  flowers  if  one  cares  to  go  on  and  on.  To  stand 
within  a  well-kept  garden  and  to  see  beyond,  the 
work  that  nature  will  do  for  us  if  we  will  but  start 
it,  a  meadow  with  naturalised  yellow  daffodils, 
an  apple  orchard  in  fairy  bloom,  a  hillside  cov- 
ered with  sheets  of  white  anemones,  groups  of 
brilliant  red  P.  officinalis  bordering  a  brook, 
masses  of  blue  iris  fringing  a  pond, — is  to  behold 
the  necessarily  smaller  garden  enlarged  and 
perfected. 

Selection  of  Place  for  Planting 
In  selecting  the  location  for  planting  peonies 
it  is  important  to  keep  a  few  fundamental  prin- 
ciples in  mind. 

Good  drainage  is  vital:   while  the  peony  de- 
mands a  plentiful  supply  of  water  just  before 


Japanese  or  i 


PHILOMELE 
(Calot,  1861) 
type.     The  collar  of  deep  yellow  gives  this  flower  a  most  striking  appearance 


WHERE  TO  PLANT 

and  during  the  blooming  season,  excessive  moist- 
ure at  any  time  is  most  injurious  to  it.  To  ob- 
tain the  best  results  it  is  desirable  that  ample 
watering  facilities  should  be  easily  available. 

In  some  cases  where  perfectly  sound  peonies 
have  been  planted  in  poorly  drained  soil,  they 
have  been  attacked  and  damaged  by  a  destructive 
worm  or  grub ;  when  the  roots  were  lifted,  freed 
of  the  worms,  divided  and  replanted  in  well 
drained  soil  the  plants  regained  health.  In  many 
instances  of  standing  water  the  roots  have  rotted 
away  entirely :  "  disappeared  "  as  one  surprised 
and  indignant  gardener  said.  At  the  other 
extreme,  a  hard  dry  soil  is  almost  equally 
undesirable. 

The  planting  of  peonies  very  near  trees  or 
building  foundations  is  not  a  good  practice. 
Under  trees  the  shade  is  frequently  dense  and  the 
tree  roots,  accurately  described  as  voracious,  rob 
the  peonies  of  both  food  and  water.  Close  to 
building  foundations  not  only  is  the  ground  dry, 
but  the  roots  are  subject  to  roof  drippings  and 
snow  drifts.  To  expect  peonies,  even  with  their 
hardy  constitutions,  to  bloom  under  such  condi- 
tions is  really  asking  too  much  of  them. 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

Peonies  do  well  in  full  sun,  in  light  shade,  or 
in  a  position  where  they  are  shaded  a  part  of  each 
day.  If  sheltered  from  the  wind  by  shrubs, 
hedges,  walls  or  buildings  at  a  short  distance  it 
will  be  a  distinct  advantage.  Such  a  protection 
is  especially  valuable  in  the  case  of  the  single 
varieties,  the  blooms  of  which  are  somewhat 
fragile. 

Peonies  are  indeed  "  gross-feeders."  To  put 
forth  strong  stems,  heavy  foliage  and  masses  of 
large  flowers  all  within  ten  or  twelve  weeks,  it 
is  only  natural  that  they  must  have  food  and 
drink  in  abundance.  Peonies  thrive  best  in  a 
rich,  heavy  loam.  A  clay  loam  which  has  been 
made  friable  or  a  good  vegetable  garden  soil  makes 
an  excellent  soil  for  them.  Rows  of  peonies 
along  the  path  edges  give  a  finish  to  the  garden 
and  furnish  quantities  of  flowers  for  cutting  from 
a  place  where  they  can  best  be  spared. 

The  person  who  has  only  a  few  peonies  can 
put  them  in  the  flower  border.  If  small  roots  are 
thus  placed,  they  should  not  be  crowded  or  shaded 
by  other  plants,  as  this  causes  the  leaves  to  shrivel 
or  wither  and  retards  the  development  of  the  root 

140 


HOW  TO  PREPARE  THE  SOIL 
buds  for  the  following  year.  Large,  strong 
clumps,  or  the  smaller  roots  planted  in  groups 
are  not  so  apt  to  meet  with  this  misfortune.  As 
the  foliage  of  the  peony  is  admirable  in  itself, 
plenty  of  space  for  the  plant  can  be  left  without 
injuring  the  appearance  of  the  border. 

How  to  Prepake  the  Soil 
The  peony  probably  asks  less  of  its  owner  in 
the  way  of  care  than  any  other  perennial  except 
the  iris.  One  often  reads  in  catalogues  the  state- 
ment in  reference  to  the  peony  that  "  once  planted 
all  is  done,"  and  if  the  word  "  properly  "  is  in- 
serted between  "  once  "  and  "  planted  "  this  may 
be  said  to  be  almost  literally  true.  Even  the  most 
neglected  peony,  if  healthy,  will  manage  to  make 
its  own  living,  and  bloom  in  some  manner  under 
adverse  circumstances.  But  in  peonies,  as  in 
other  things,  there  is  a  price  to  pay  for  perfec- 
tion. Part  of  the  price  is  careful  attention  to 
the  details  of  planting. 

A  deeply  spaded  place  should  always  be  pre- 
pared for  peonies.  In  borders,  holes  two  and 
one-half  feet  in  depth  and  three  feet  in  diameter 
can  be  made,  and  filled  with  rich  top  soil  care- 
fully mixed  with  well-rotted  manure.     A  good 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

proportion  is  one  part  by  bulk  of  manure  (or  com- 
post) to  nine  parts  of  top  soil — as  noted  in  direc- 
tions for  preparing  a  trench.  In  very  fertile 
ground,  when  the  top  soil  is  not  shallow  and  the 
subsoil  is  not  a  hard  clay,  a  deep  and  thorough 
spading  and  the  addition  of  the  requisite  amount 
of  manure  will  give  excellent  results. 

If  the  flowers  are  not  merely  an  effective  in- 
cident in  the  border  but  are  the  chief  object  of 
one's  endeavours,  peonies  should  be  placed  in  a 
bed  by  themselves,  where  they  will  make  better 
growth  than  when  crowded  in  with  other  plants. 
In  planting  peonies  in  a  bed  considerable  space 
should  be  left  between  them  to  allow  for  the 
full  growth  of  the  massive  roots  which  develop  in 
the  ten  or  twelve  years  during  which  the  peonies 
should  be  undisturbed.  The  minimum  distance 
apart  at  which  they  should  ever  be  planted  is  two 
and  a  half  feet  each  way.  A  distance  of  three 
and  a  half  or  four  feet  each  way  is  much  to  be 
preferred. 

The  ideal  way  to  grow  peonies,  and  one  which 
by  the  expenditure  of  some  time,  patience  and 
money  can  be  made  real,  is  to  plant  them  in  ground 
that  has  been  trenched  to  the  depth  of  two  and  a 


HOW  TO  PREPARE  THE  SOIL 

half  or  three  feet  and  filled  with  top  soil  enriched 
with  well-rotted  manure  or  compost. 

"  Top  soil,"  strange  though  it  may  seem  to 
one  struggling  with  numerous  bewildering  tech- 
nicalities, means  exactly  what  it  says:  it  is  the 
soil  lying  on  top  of  the  earth.  It  usually  con- 
tains decayed  vegetable  matter,  some  of  which 
has  come  down  to  us  from  the  Palaeozoic  and 
other  polysyllabic  ages.  As  might  be  supposed, 
the  "  decayed  vegetable  matter  "  is  quite  well  de- 
cayed. The  top  soil  on  account  of  its  difference 
in  colour  and  texture  can  readily  be  distinguished 
from  the  subsoil.  The  depth  of  top  soil  varies 
from  two  inches  to  four  feet :  the  usual  depth  on 
the  level  in  the  middle  Atlantic  States  is  about 
six  inches. 

Top  soil  in  which  peonies  have  not  been  grown 
before  is  best.  It  has  been  proved  by  much  ex- 
perience that  peonies  do  not  thrive  in  a  soil  in 
which  peonies  have  previously  been  grown.  There 
is  also  the  possibility  of  the  soil  having  been  in- 
fected by  some  peony  root  that  was  diseased. 

The  operations  necessary  to  prepare  the  trench 
are  extremely  simple  and  extremely  laborious. 
After  the  length  and  width  of  the  trench  are  de- 

143 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 
termined,  the  dimensions  should  be  staked  out  or 
marked  off.  The  top  soil  of  the  trench  should  be 
removed  and  placed  alongside.  The  use  of  a 
plough,  if  the  trench  is  sufficiently  long  and  wide 
to  permit  it,  will  save  much  labour.  The  top  soil 
can  thus  be  thoroughly  loosened  and  more  easily 
and  quickly  shovelled  out.  The  subsoil  should 
then  be  removed  to  the  proper  depth. 

A  little  calculation  and  planning  before  actual 
operations  are  commenced  will  prevent  a  waste 
of  time  and  money,  and  I  would  say  patience,  ex- 
cept that  patience  in  garden  lovers  is  supposedly 
inexhaustible.  It  is  well  to  figure  out  in  advance 
the  cubical  contents  of  the  trench  and  decide  where 
all  the  subsoil  is  to  be  disposed  and  where  all  the 
new  top  soil  is  to  be  obtained.  The  handling  either 
in  carts  or  wheelbarrows  should  be  so  arranged 
that  soil  is  moved  both  ways  in  one  operation; 
that  is — the  loads  of  discarded  subsoil  taken  from 
the  trench,  should,  when  dumped,  be  replaced 
by  the  top  soil  to  be  taken  to  the  trench.  Ob- 
viously the  less  number  of  trips,  and  the  shorter 
the  haul,  the  less  the  expense. 

The  mixing  of  the  top  soil  with  the  well- 
rotted  manure  or  compost  can  be  done  either 

144 


r 

.      S 

*    V 

•>* 

^H 

^k^^fc^^^^^.      .^^^| 

. 

1    ' 

^5^5 

^1  TV    i  ^1    foM^I 

CLAIRE   DUBOIS 

(Crousse,  1886) 
Rose  type.     Strong  fine  flower  of  deep  pink  tinged  with  mauve 


HOW  TO  PREPARE  THE  SOIL 

where  the  top  soil  is  obtained  or  at  the  trench 
itself,  whichever  may  be  more  convenient.  But  it 
must  be  thoroughly  mixed;  not  put  in  the  trench 
in  layers.  A  proportion  of  one  part  by  bulk  of 
manure  or  compost  to  nine  parts  of  top  soil  will 
be  satisfactory  in  most  instances. 

The  trench  should  be  more  than  filled.  It 
should  be  heaped  up  and  rounded  over  above  the 
level  of  the  adjoining  ground,  for  it  will  settle 
and  sink  to  a  surprising  degree.  For  this  reason 
it  is  best  to  prepare  the  beds  or  trenches  some 
time  in  advance  of  planting:  two  or  three  months 
is  not  too  long.  The  ground  can  be  used  for 
annuals  or  seedlings  until  it  is  time  to  put  in 
the  peonies.  In  case  the  trench  shall  have  settled 
below  the  level  of  the  garden,  additional  top  soil 
should  be  added. 

Although  the  result  of  planting  peonies  in  this 
way  justifies  the  trouble  required,  the  construc- 
tion of  such  a  trench  is  not  to  be  lightly  under- 
taken. Should  the  trench  be  of  generous  pro- 
portions, the  handling  of  many  tons  of  soil  is  in- 
volved. As  a  rough  standard  of  comparison  which 
may  be  useful  to  the  prospective  trench  maker,  I 
will  give  the  data  on  one  of  the  trenches  I  have 

10  145 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

made  in  my  garden.  The  dimensions  are  one 
hundred  feet  long  by  sixteen  feet  wide  by  two 
feet  nine  inches  deep.  As  the  top  soil  averaged 
nine  inches  in  depth,  one  hundred  and  eighteen 
cubic  yards  of  subsoil  had  to  be  removed  and  re- 
placed by  new  top  soil  and  compost.  The  length 
of  haul  to  the  place  where  the  subsoil  was  ex- 
changed for  top  soil  and  compost  was  sixty  yards 
by  barrow  and  eighty-six  yards  by  cart.  The  sub- 
soil was  a  solid  hard  pan  and  had  to  be  loosened 
by  pick,  as  dynamite  could  not  be  used  for  fear 
of  disturbing  existing  tile  drains.  This  trench 
required  the  labour  of  four  men  for  twenty-six 
working  days. 

Well-rotted  Manure  and  Compost: 
Preparation  and  Use 

Manure  is  undoubtedly  the  best  single  fer- 
tiliser for  peonies,  but  it  should  always  be  applied 
with  judgment.  I  make  a  few  practical  sugges- 
tions in  regard  to  it : 

1.  Use  only  well-rotted  manure  or  compost — 
a  mixture  of  manure  and  soil.  Probably  the 
quickest  and  most  satisfactory  way  of  preparing 
compost  is  to  follow  the  method  used  by  many 
market  gardeners.    A  pile  of  new  manure  (pref- 

146 


HOW  TO  PREPARE  THE  SOIL 

erably  horse  and  cow  manure  mixed)  about  six 
feet  wide  at  the  bottom  and  four  feet  high,  and 
of  any  length  desired,  is  made  with  sloping  sides, 
so  that  the  top  of  the  pile  is  about  three  feet  wide. 
About  an  inch  of  top  soil  is  then  thrown  loosely 
over  the  entire  pile.  Thus  covered  the  manure 
heats  and  in  a  week  or  ten  days  produces  steam, 
which  rises  when  the  pile  is  opened  for  inspection. 
The  pile,  earth  and  all,  is  then  turned  with  a  six- 
tined  fork,  all  lumps  are  thoroughly  broken,  and 
a  new  pile  is  made.  The  new  pile  is  covered  with 
earth  as  before  and  allowed  to  stand  about  ten 
days  or  until  it  heats  again,  when  the  process  is 
repeated.  Every  ten  days,  as  often  as  the  pile 
heats,  which  it  usually  does  four  or  five  times,  it  is 
turned  and  covered.  When  it  ceases  to  heat  it  is 
left  to  stand  until  used.  The  turning  of  the  pile 
supplies  the  required  air  to  the  bacteria  in  the 
manure.  Without  air  they  die,  the  manure  fire- 
fangs  and  becomes  almost  worthless. 

The  pile  of  compost  should  be  made  at  least 
four  months  before  using ;  six  months  is  a  prefer- 
able period.  By  the  time  it  is  used,  it  will  be 
found  to  be  black,  friable,  and  easily  handled 
with  a  spade  instead  of  a  fork. 

The  distinct  advantages  in  composting  ma- 

147 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

nure  as  above  described  instead  of  simply  turn- 
ing it  in  the  classical  manner  lie  in:  (a)  the  pre- 
vention of  leaching — due  to  the  absorption  of 
liquid  by  the  top  soil  used;  (b)  the  desirable  tex- 
ture of  the  compost — due  to  the  admixture  of 
top  soil;  (c)  the  comparative  shortness  of  time  in 
which  the  compost  becomes  available. 

2.  In  preparing  a  place — large  or  small — 
for  planting,  mix  the  manure  (or  compost)  and 
the  soil  with  great  thoroughness.  This  point  is 
of  the  utmost  importance. 

3.  Do  not  put  manure  in  layers  in  any  part 
of  the  trench  or  hole.  Solid  manure  is  danger- 
ous if  in  direct  contact  with  roots,  as  it  is  apt  to 
rot  or  burn  them,  or  to  produce  fungi.  Dessert, 
the  French  peony  grower  and  authority,  warns 
especially  against  this. 

4.  Do  not  mix  too  great  a  portion  of  manure 
with  the  soil.  One  of  the  most  successful  growers 
in  this  country  has  found,  in  his  many  years  of 
experience,  that  it  is  possible  to  make  the  soil 
too  rich  to  obtain  the  best  results  with  peonies. 

5.  Do  not  mulch  peonies  with  manure  even 
although  it  is  well  rotted:  they  may  not  rot,  and 
again  they  may.  Mulching  with  manure  is  not 
necessary  and  is  a  distinct  risk. 

148 


PLANTING  AND  CULTIVATION 


CHAPTER  VII 

PLANTING  AND  CULTIVATION 

DR.  EDWARD  B.  VOORHEES,  the  ex- 
pert on  crops  and  soils,  was  accustomed 
to  say  that  in  the  latitude  of  New  Jersey  the 
proper  time  for  seeding  alfalfa  is  August  15th  at 
8  a.m.  The  psychological  effect  on  the  hearers 
of  such  an  unconventional  statement  was  usually 
startling — incredulity,  scorn  or  amazement,  as  the 
case  might  be,  depending  upon  the  wisdom  of  the 
individual — but  nearly  every  one  remembered  the 
date. 

I  shall  try  the  same  method  of  firmly  fixing 
in  the  mind  of  the  peony  lover  the  proper  time 
to  begin  planting:  it  is  September  15th,  at  9  a.m. 
( I  do  not  believe  in  hurrying  through  breakfast!) 
The  planter  of  peonies  is  more  fortunate  than 
the  sower  of  alfalfa  in  that  he  has  a  longer  period 
of  time  in  which  to  do  his  work :  planting  that  will 
give  entirely  satisfactory  results  can  be  carried  on 
for  five  or  six  weeks  after  the  day  for  starting.  This 
date  is  not  chosen  from  a  whim — it  is  based  on  sub- 

151 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

stantial  reasons.  Earlier  than  September  15th, 
moving  checks  the  development  of  the  unmatured 
root  buds  which  hold  the  leaves  and  flowers  for 
the  following  year.  But  by  the  middle  of  Sep- 
tember the  root  buds  are  usually  fully  formed 
and  will  not  be  injured  by  lifting.  Planting  in 
the  early  Autumn  gives  another  advantage.  If 
the  soil  has  ample  chance  before  frost  to  settle 
around  the  newly  planted  roots,  they  are  less 
likely  to  "  heave  "  during  the  winter. 

Peonies  can,  of  course,  be  put  in  the  ground 
at  any  time  until  the  ground  is  frozen;  but  the 
later  the  planting  is  done  the  poorer  will  be  the 
growth  made  the  following  season.  Spring  plant- 
ing is  most  inexpedient  and  usually  means  no 
flowers  until  the  next  year.  Peonies  start  to 
grow  the  first  warm  days  in  the  spring.  If  trans- 
planted then  it  is  almost  impossible  to  avoid  dam- 
aging the  little  white  feeding  rootlets  at  a  time 
when  they  should  be  left  untouched  to  give  the 
plant  the  greatest  amount  of  nourishment  needed 
to  prepare  it  for  the  blooming  season  so  near  at 
hand. 

Iris  is  affected  by  transplanting  the  least  of 
any  perennial  that  I  have  ever  grown.    Peonies 

152 


MADAME  DE  VATRY 

(Guerin,  1853) 
Crown  type.     An  inexpensive  peony  of  great  beauty 


PLANTING  AND  CULTIVATION 

and  poppies  object  to  it  the  most.  Indeed,  peo- 
nies go  so  far  as  to  protest  against  being  moved 
even  when  the  moving  is  done  at  the  right  time 
under  the  most  favourable  conditions :  they  show 
their  resentment  by  failing  to  give  their  best  in 
foliage  and  blooms  for  at  least  one  season.  It  is 
therefore  important  to  plant  them  not  in  make- 
shift or  temporary  places,  but  in  permanent  loca- 
tions where  they  can  remain  undisturbed  for  a 
number  of  years.  In  order  to  accomplish  this 
end  with  a  minimum  of  effort  and  to  enjoy  the 
process  into  the  bargain,  the  knowing  gardener 
will  plant  on  paper  a  considerable  time  in  ad- 
vance of  the  actual  planting.  Paper  planting 
gives  a  chance  to  change  one's  mind,  rearrange 
colour  combinations  and  improve  the  plan:  on 
paper  the  roots  may  be  shifted  endless  times  with- 
out the  slightest  possibility  of  damage  or  set-back. 
If  the  suggestions  I  have  made  are  followed, 
by  the  time  the  roots  arrive  from  the  grower  both 
the  place  and  the  plan  of  planting  will  be  ready 
and  each  peony  can  be  put  in  its  appointed  abode 
with  little  chance  of  error.  It  is  advisable  to  plant 
promptly  when  the  roots  are  received,  so  that  they 
may  have  ample  opportunity  to  get  established. 

153 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 
As  the  roots  are  usually  well  paeked  in  dampened 
moss  or  peat,  they  may,  if  necessary,  be  left  in 
the  box  for  some  time ;  but,  unless  the  soil  of  the 
garden  be  lumpy  or  muddy  from  recent  rain,  there 
is  nothing  except  convenience  to  be  gained  by 
delay. 

Planting 

To  open  a  case  of  fine  peony  roots  is  a  pleas- 
ure; the  roots  themselves  are  beautiful  things, 
strong,  firm  and  fleshy,  with  their  delicate  little 
white  rootlets  and  big  crisp  eyes  that  hold  the 
future  glory  of  the  garden.  A  label  is  attached  to 
every  plant:  as  one  joyfully  reads  over  the  names, 
visions  of  each  perfect  flower  arise.  One's  delight 
in  the  peony  garden  to  be  begins  perhaps  with 
reading  the  catalogues :  one's  delight  in  the  actual 
garden  begins  right  here — at  planting. 

The  roots  and  buds  are  as  fragile  as  bits  of 
old  china  and,  lest  pieces  be  broken  off,  must  be 
handled  as  tenderly.  After  they  are  taken  from 
the  case  they  should  be  examined,  checked  and 
sorted.  The  general  rule  of  keeping  roots  moist 
during  the  process  of  transplanting  applies 
to  the  peony.     A  dampened  burlap  bag  thrown 


PLANTING  AND  CULTIVATION 
over  the  plants  will  prevent  the  drying  out  of 
the  feeding  rootlets  by  the  sun  or  wind.  This 
covering  should  be  put  on  at  once  on  unpacking, 
and  should  not  be  removed  until  everything  is 
ready  to  place  the  root  in  the  hole. 

The  fleshy  roots  of  an  individual  peony  plant 
vary  in  length.  It  is  important  that  the  hole 
should  be  made  large  enough  to  receive  them  with- 
out the  stubbing  or  cramping  of  a  single  root. 
As  the  roots  of  a  plant  receive  their  nourishment 
from  the  soil,  and  not  from  each  other  or  from 
the  air,  they  should  be  planted  so  as  to  present 
to  contact  with  the  soil  the  greatest  possible  area. 
It  is  a  curious  commentary  on  horticultural 
human  nature,  and  a  fact  to  bear  in  mind,  that  all 
gardeners  seem  to  be  passionately  averse  to  dig- 
ging holes  of  sufficient  size  to  accommodate  prop- 
erly roots  of  any  kind  without  crowding  or 
bending. 

The  uppermost  eyes  of  the  roots  are  usually 
placed  between  two  and  three  inches  below  the 
surface  of  the  ground  when  levelled  off.  Three 
inches  is  a  better  depth  than  two.  One  grower 
of  much  experience  advocates  planting  between 
three  and  four  inches  deep.  He  finds  that  at  this 
depth  the  root  is  less  susceptible  to  disease.    It  is 

J55 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

my  rule  to  come  as  near  three  inches  as  is  humanly 
possible. 

Too  deep  planting  sometimes  causes  "  blind  " 
growth — that  is,  the  stalks  and  leaves  appear  and 
grow  but  produce  no  flower.  Too  shallow  plant- 
ing makes  greater  the  possibility  of  the  root  being 
displaced  by  frost  during  the  winter  or  early 
spring.  If  the  root  of  a  peony  is  on,  or  too  near, 
the  surface,  it  will  rot  away  in  a  year  or  two. 
Inasmuch  as  peonies  are  both  expensive  and  valu- 
able, and  inasmuch  as  the  care  and  labour  of 
planting  are  considerable,  it  pays  well  to  see  that 
the  work  is  properly  done  the  first  time  they  are 
planted. 

Some  of  the  large  peony  roots  come  with  a 
hollow  directly  under  the  crown.  In  planting, 
this  space  should  be  conscientiously  filled  with 
soil  without  pressure  on  the  roots,  which  are  not 
only  brittle  in  themselves,  but  are  in  such  a  posi- 
tion that  the  slightest  pressure  will  cause  a  break. 

As  each  plant  is  put  in  its  appointed  place — 
and  not  before — the  nursery  label  should  be  re- 
moved and  attached  to  a  garden  stake.  Before 
soil  is  placed  over  the  plant  the  garden  stake 
should  be  carefully  inserted  between  the  roots. 


MADAME  BUCQUET 

(Dessert,  1888) 
Semi-rose  type.     A  dark  red  peony  of  medium  size,  with  fine  foliage  and  reddish  stems 


MODELE  DE  PERFECTION 
(Crousse,  1875) 

Rose  type.    One  of  the  fine  pinks  of  unusual  form.     Has  strong  steins,  beautiful  foliage  and  is  a  free 
Jr  bloomer 


PLANTING  AND  CULTIVATION 

This  prevents  forcing  the  stake  into  the  ground 
at  a  point  where  it  may  injure  the  peony.  The 
plant  should  then  be  covered  with  fine  soil,  pressed 
down  with  the  hands :  tramping  is  too  rough  treat- 
ment for  these  roots.  After  the  ground  is  firmed, 
I  usually  draw  a  circle  around  each  plant  in  the 
soft  dirt.  This  serves  as  a  reminder  of  its  exact 
position  and  warns  one  against  treading  upon 
that  root  in  the  pre-occupation  of  planting  others. 

Record  of  Planting 

Labels,  even  in  the  most  carefully  kept  garden, 
easily  become  misplaced  or  blurred :  a  clearly  pre- 
pared diagram  is  the  only  infallible  method  of 
which  I  have  ever  heard  for  keeping  track  of 
the  roots.  In  addition  to  any  "  orientation  "  based 
on  trees  and  fences,  which  may  be  moved  or  de- 
stroyed, a  point  of  the  compass  should  be  in- 
dicated. After  the  planting  is  done  the  diagram, 
with  date,  names  and  condition  of  roots,  and  name 
of  dealer  from  whom  they  were  bought,  should  be 
copied  into  a  permanent  garden-book. 

Without  such  a  plan,  should  the  labels  be 
lost  and  the  names  forgotten,  the  peonies  will 
grow  just  as  lustily  and  flower  just  as  freely  as 

157 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

if  a  plan  had  been  made.  It  will  be  found,  how- 
ever, that  a  full  schedule  of  all  plantings  is  in- 
valuable for  reference  if  not  for  blooming.  The 
duplication  of  an  order  of  some  especially  allur- 
ing kind,  if  one  does  not  know  its  name,  is  usually- 
difficult.  Then,  too,  peonies  have  a  pleasing  way 
of  increasing  in  monetary  worth;  often  some 
rare  variety  is  practically  unobtainable  except 
from  an  amateur's  collection.  Unless  they  have 
a  name  and  are  true  to  it,  they  lose  all  value  ex- 
cept for  decoration  and  sentiment.  Whether  the 
number  of  peonies  planted  be  large  or  small  it 
is  well  worth  while  to  take  the  trouble  of  making 
a  written  record. 

Mulching 
If  the  soil  has  been  prepared  for  planting  as 
suggested,  it  is  not  necessary  to  do  anything  fur- 
ther until  winter  comes.  The  first  winter  after 
planting,  as  the  roots  in  all  probability  have  not 
yet  become  firmly  imbedded  in  the  soil,  and  may 
heave  easily  when  the  frost  comes  out  of  the 
ground,  a  mulch  or  covering  should  be  put  over 
them.  But  beware  of  mulching  with  manure. 
Although  this  is  advised  by  some  persons  it  has 

158 


PLANTING  AND  CULTIVATION 

resulted  in  many  instances  in  the  rotting  away 
of  the  root.  While  the  peony  is  a  gross  feeder, 
manure — always  well-rotted — or  compost  should 
be  applied  to  it  with  both  discretion  and  restraint. 
I  have  mentioned  this  in  Chapter  VI  on  the 
preparation  of  the  soil,  and  refer  to  it  again 
here,  because  mulching  many  perennials  with 
manure  is  a  common  and  successful  practice.  In 
my  observation  and  experience  such  mulching  has 
in  numerous  cases  proved  harmful  to  peonies.  In 
my  own  garden,  the  only  peonies  I  have  ever 
lost  have  rotted  away  from  a  manure  mulch. 

Straw  or  leaves  make  the  best  mulch,  but 
should  not  be  applied  too  heavily:  three  or  four 
inches  of  loose  material  are  sufficient.  Last  year, 
as  a  cover  for  a  newly  planted  bed,  I  used  corn 
stover  with  good  results.  Chicken  wire  stretched 
over  the  straw  or  leaves  and  staked  at  the  edges 
keeps  them  from  blowing  away  in  the  high  winds 
of  winter. 

It  has  been  suggested  that  the  leaves  of  the 
peony  plants  be  cut  and  thrown  back  on  the  roots 
for  a  mulch  in  the  Autumn.  This  would  be  good 
practice  were  it  not  for  the  danger  of  spreading 
any  fungoid  diseases  to  which  the  peony  is  sub- 

159 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

ject.  At  one  time  I  followed  this  method,  but 
now,  out  of  an  abundance  of  caution,  I  cut  down 
and  burn  the  foliage  of  my  peonies  in  the  late  fall. 
After  the  first  winter  many  successful  gar- 
deners do  not  cover  peonies,  and  there  are  indeed 
instances  of  these  plants  flourishing  as  far  north 
as  Manitoba  without  being  mulched.  When  it 
is  remembered  that  the  original  habitat  of  P. 
albiflora  is  Siberia,  the  rule  that  they  can  be  grown 
without  protection  wherever  apples  thrive  would 
seem  to  be  safe.  In  addition  to  latitude,  the  na- 
ture of  the  soil  should  be  taken  into  account  in 
this  connection.  In  most  instances  I  think  one 
should  be  guided  by  local  conditions :  in  latitudes 
where  zero  weather  is  prevalent  and  in  soil  which 
is  heavy,  a  light  cover  can  be  used  to  advantage. 

Cultivating  and  Weeding 
During  the  first  warm  days  of  spring  the 
mulch  of  straw  or  leaves  should  be  promptly  re- 
moved, for  the  peony  shoots  break  through  the 
ground  early  in  the  season.  As  soon  as  the  soil 
is  sufficiently  dry,  the  beds  should  be  thoroughly 
cultivated  to  a  depth  of  two  inches.  Care  must 
be  used  not  to  touch  the  crowns  of  the  plants. 

160 


PLANTING  AND  CULTIVATION 

After  this  first  loosening  of  the  soil,  it  should  be 
worked  and  weeded  regularly  as  the  weeds  ap- 
pear. In  spite  of  the  point  of  view  of  the  lazy 
man,  weeds  really  perform  a  useful  function  in 
the  world.  Without  the  wish  to  be  rid  of  their 
presence  the  soil  would  be  apt  to  be  neglected 
and  we  would  lose  the  dust  mulch  and  the  bene- 
ficial bacterial  activity  brought  about  by  stirring 
and  aeration.  So,  faithful  weeding  must  be 
added  to  the  care  of  the  beloved  peony. 

Watering 
While  the  peony  will  withstand  dryness  of 
the  soil  to  the  point  of  drought  without  succumb- 
ing, a  reasonable  amount  of  moisture  is  essen- 
tial for  the  best  development.  As  the  ground  be- 
comes parched  under  the  hot  Spring  sun  an  occa- 
sional watering  will  help  to  increase  the  size  and 
improve  the  colour  of  the  blooms.  If  the  Spring 
season  is  unusually  dry  the  plants  should  be 
drenched  once  a  week  in  order  to  obtain  the  finest 
flowers.  For  this  purpose  plain  water  is  best  on 
newly  prepared  beds  and  liquid  manure  on  older 
beds.  In  watering  it  is  well  to  keep  the  buds, 
flowers  and  leaves  dry  and  to  moisten  the  roots 
alone. 

11  161 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

Should  August  and  September  be  low  in 
rainfall,  it  is  also  desirable  to  apply  some  moist- 
ure in  those  months.  As  an  instance  of  peonies 
being  dependent  on  water  the  season  of  1911  in 
England  is  instructive.  Peony  flowers  were 
almost  a  complete  failure  in  that  year:  growers 
attributed  this  to  the  drought  in  April  and  May, 
1911,  and  a  drought  in  the  summer  and  fall  of 
1910. 

Disbudding 

In  many  varieties  of  P.  albiflora,  three  flower 
buds,  two  lateral  and  one  terminal,  appear  on 
each  stem.  By  pinching  off  the  lateral  buds  as 
soon  as  it  is  possible  to  get  hold  of  them,  additional 
strength  will  be  thrown  into  the  remaining  bud 
and  an  increase  of  the  size  and  beauty  of  the 
flowers  will  result. 

Disbudding  entails  considerable  work  when 
one  has  a  large  number  of  peonies:  it  is  usually 
done  when  flowers  for  cutting  or  exhibition  pur- 
poses are  desired.  Still  the  ardent  gardener,  who 
knows  his  every  peony  by  name  and  watches  each 
individual  flower  unfold  day  by  day,  finds  the 
task  far  from  irksome  and  would  gladly  do  twice 
as  much.    Single  peonies,  because  of  the  decora- 


Stalk  of  P.  albiflora  showing  terminal  bud  which  should  be  left  and  lateral 
buds  which  should  be  removed  or  pinched  off 


Dormant  healthy  peony  root 


PLANTING  AND  CULTIVATION 

tive  effect  of  their  clusters,  are  not  usually  dis- 
budded. 

Another  method  of  obtaining  large  flowers 
is  to  pinch  off  several  of  the  weaker  shoots  in 
the  Spring  soon  after  they  appear  above  ground. 
The  growth  which  would  have  gone  into  these 
shoots  is  thus  diverted  into  the  ones  that  are  left, 
which  will  attain  greater  size  and  vigour. 

Fertilisers 

Until  Dr.  Bose's  wonderful  invention,  the 
crescograph,  which  determines  in  a  quarter  of  an 
hour  the  exact  action  of  fertiliser  applied  to 
plants,  is  readily  available,  I  suppose  we  shall 
have  to  be  content  with  somewhat  haphazard  con- 
clusions on  the  effect  of  adding  food  to  the  soil. 

If  especially  large  blooms  are  desired,  I  find 
it  well  worth  while  to  apply  chemical  fertilisers  in 
addition  to  manure.  While  manure  is  the  most 
valuable  single  fertiliser  on  account  of  its  stimu- 
lating the  bacteria  in  the  soil,  and  can,  in  the 
form  of  weak  manure  water,  be  used  safely  in 
the  cultivation  of  peonies,  it  needs  to  be  balanced 
by  the  addition  of  phosphoric  acid  and  potash. 
Without  such  balancing,  the  excess  of  nitrogen 

163 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

in  the  manure  may  produce  too  great  leaf  growth 
at  the  expense  of  flowers.  A  mixture  consisting 
of  two  ounces  of  phosphoric  acid  and  two  ounces 
of  muriate  of  potash  placed  around  a  plant  in  the 
Autumn  in  a  circle  of  the  same  size  as  the  circle 
formed  by  the  outside  leaves  of  the  plant,  will 
be  of  considerable  benefit  without  incurring  any 
danger  of  injury  to  the  roots.  This  quantity  is 
recommended  for  a  clump  four  or  five  years  old : 
the  exact  amount  in  each  case  depends  upon  the 
size  and  condition  of  the  roots  and  the  available 
general  fertility  of  the  soil.  Since  potash  has  be- 
come so  scarce  on  account  of  the  war,  I  have  been 
using  a  mixture  of  bone  meal  (four  ounces)  and 
wood  ashes  (six  ounces)  with  apparently  excel- 
lent results.  It  is  desirable  to  make  the  applica- 
tion during  the  Autumn  just  before  a  rain.  The 
fertiliser  should  be  lightly  dug  in  with  a  small 
hand  fork. 

Supports 
The  original  P.  albiflora  in  Siberia  was  prob- 
ably not  beaten  down  by  the  rain.  Some  captious 
critics  of  the  peony  complain  because  the  flower 
of  to-day — bred  solely  for  size  and  beauty — needs 
support.     Every  attainment  is  apt  to  have  its 

164 


PLANTING  AND  CULTIVATION 

corresponding  drawback :  in  the  case  of  the  peony, 
the  drawback  can  be  obviated  by  a  little  initiative 
and  some  stout  wire.  The  best  method  of  sup- 
porting individual  plants  is  probably  that  de- 
scribed by  Prof.  Jackson,  in  1904,  as  follows: 
"  Three  iron  rods  three  feet  long  are  made  of 
heavy  wire  one-quarter  of  an  inch  in  diameter,  an 
eyelet  is  bent  in  the  top,  and  the  rods  are  gal- 
vanised after  they  are  cut  and  bent.  A  circular 
connecting  wire  of  lighter  weight,  one-eighth  of 
an  inch  in  diameter  and  six  feet  six  inches  long, 
is  passed  through  the  eyelets  and  made  secure  by 
looping  wire.  Thus  one  can  have  the  circular  wire 
of  full  size,  or  reduced  to  any  smaller  diameter 
desired,  and  held  in  the  reduced  size  by  tying 
one  end.  Such  supports  are  very  inconspicuous, 
being  practically  invisible  in  a  well-grown  plant, 
and  have  given  satisfaction  to  several  peony 
growers  who  have  tried  them." 

In  gardens  where  expense  is  considered,  I 
have  seen  practical  and  cheap  supports  of  home 
production.  A  barrel  hoop,  either  of  wood  or 
metal,  was  neatly  secured  to  three  wooden  stakes 
and  the  whole  painted  grass  green. 

Probably  every  peony  lover  has  his  own  special 

165 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

kind  of  support  to  fit  his  taste  or  purse ;  so  long 
as  it  fulfils  its  purpose,  who  shall  criticise?  But 
supports  the  peonies  must  have,  while  in  bloom, 
and  the  circular  design  in  some  rigid  material 
which  allows  the  leaves  and  stems  freedom  is  best. 
Surely  no  gardener  will  be  so  cruel  as  to  tie  the 
entire  plant  to  a  stake,  where  it  would  give  a 
pitiful  resemblance  to  lovely  Andromeda  en- 
chained and  suffering. 

Cutting 
Peonies  as  cut  flowers  are  being  more  and 
more  appreciated.  Pale  pink  masses  of  Madame 
Lemonier  in  a  big  silver  loving  cup,  or  a  crys- 
tal vase  filled  with  blooms  of  Duchesse  de  Ne- 
mours with  creamy  chalices  tinged  with  faint 
sea  foam  green,  make  a  bewildering  burst  of 
beauty  which  one  never  forgets.  In  the  house, 
too,  one  can  observe  the  flowers  at  one's  leisure 
and  enjoy  to  the  full  every  lovely  tint  or  varying 
shade.  This  is  particularly  true  of  the  light-col- 
oured blooms  which — unless  protected — are  apt 
to  fade  out  in  the  strong  sunlight  of  the  garden. 
It  is  not  often  realised  that  the  absorption  of 
water  in  large  quantities  directly  through  the  stem 
greatly  increases  the  size  of  the  flower  over  what 
it  would  have  been  if  left  on  the  plant. 


MADAME   D.  TREYERAN 

(Dessert,  1889) 

Semi-rose  type.     The  wire  supports  mentioned  in  Chapter  VII  are  shown 


PLANTING  AND  CULTIVATION 

Gathered  when  in  full  bloom,  peony  flowers 
often  last  well  for  several  days ;  but  for  them  to 
keep  their  freshness  for  the  longest  time  they 
should  be  cut  when  in  the  bud  and  allowed  to 
begin  to  open  in  a  dark,  cool  place.  Treated  in 
this  way  I  have  had  flowers  retain  their  splendour 
over  a  week.  Unless  one  has  many  hours  free 
to  spend  in  the  garden,  one  loses  much  of  the 
enchanting  opening  of  the  peony — an  additional 
reason  for  cutting  rare  and  delicate  varieties  and 
allowing  them  to  open  in  the  house. 

There  is  a  certain  point  in  the  development  of 
the  bud  which  marks  the  proper  time  to  cut  it. 
In  most  varieties  the  right  time  is  just  as  the 
outer  petals  unfold.  If  cut  earlier,  the  buds  may 
be  so  checked  as  to  refuse  to  open  at  all.  But 
peonies  having  tight,  hard  buds,  naturally  slow 
to  open  like  Mathilde  de  Roseneck,  should  be 
allowed  to  expand  well  before  cutting.  As  the 
stem  is  cut  it  should  be  plunged  instantly  into  a 
pail  of  cool  water:  if  this  is  not  done,  air  enters 
the  stem,  the  sap  circulation  is  seriously  inter- 
fered with  and  the  bud  wilts.  The  pail  contain- 
ing the  buds  should  be  put  in  a  cool,  dark  place 
until  desired  to  have  the  buds  open.     As  with 

1(57 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

other  cut  flowers,  the  ends  of  the  stems  should  be 
snipped  and  the  water  changed  every  day. 

In  cutting  peonies,  I  always  leave  plenty  of 
foliage  on  each  plant,  so  that  it  will  have  enough 
leaves  to  sustain  continued  growth.  The  flower 
stalk  should  never  be  cut  to  the  ground.  Some 
stem  and  two  or  three  leaves  should  always  be 
left.  Otherwise  the  root  buds  will  be  small  and 
poor  the  following  year. 

Artificial  Shade 
If  one  wishes  the  peonies  of  pale  and  delicate 
colours  to  remain  on  the  plants,  an  overhead 
screen  will  protect  the  blooms  from  the  bleaching 
effects  of  the  sun.  When  the  plants  are  in  beds 
or  groups  a  movable  cover  can  be  used  in  the  fol- 
lowing way.  A  strip  of  cheese-cloth  is  arranged 
with  little  rings  sewed  at  short  intervals  along  each 
side.  Through  these  rings  are  passed  strong 
wires  which,  when  pulled  tight,  are  firmly  fast- 
ened to  stakes  at  each  end  of  the  planting.  While 
the  sun  is  strong,  the  cheese-cloth  is  left  in  place 
over  the  peonies.  At  night  or  on  rainy  days  it 
is  pushed  to  one  end  of  the  bed  and  tied  out  of 
the  way. 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

A  recent  device  designed  to  protect  individual 
blooms  from  sun  and  rain  is  ingenious  and  prac- 
tical. It  consists  of  a  cone-shaped  cover  about 
seven  inches  broad  at  the  base,  made  of  oiled  or 
waxed  linen,  attached  to  a  metal  rod  and  adjust- 
able to  the  height  of  the  peony  over  which  it 
is  placed. 

Diseases 

Compared  with  other  garden  plants,  the  peony 
has  a  wonderful  constitution  and  seems  to  lead  a 
charmed  life.  It  is  not,  however,  entirely  free 
from  disease.  Instead  of  with  alarm,  the  earnest 
gardener  will  read  with  interest  and  profit  the 
lecture  on  Diseases  of  the  Peony,  delivered  by 
Professor  H.  H.  Whetzel,  of  Cornell  Univer- 
sity, before  the  Massachusetts  Horticultural  So- 
ciety. I  have  reprinted  this  as  an  appendix. 
Professor  Whetzel  makes  several  valuable  sug- 
gestions as  to  the  control  of  some  of  the  diseases 
of  the  peony. 

As  preventive  measures  are  also  advisable,  I 
tabulate  briefly  a  few  points  which  the  beginner 
may  find  of  assistance. 

I.  In  purchasing,  be  careful  in  making  a  selec- 
tion.    Some  varieties,   although  beautiful,   are 


PLANTING  AND  CULTIVATION 

weak  and  susceptible  to  disease.  A  rigid  inspec- 
tion of  every  peony  root  before  it  is  planted  in 
one's  garden  soil  is  important. 

II.  Use  great  caution  in  applying  manure. 

III.  In  the  fall,  remove  and  burn  all  foliage. 

IV.  Do  not  plant  peonies  twice  in  the  same 
soil. 

Rose-bugs  and  Ants 
In  this  country  the  only  insect  enemy  of  the 
peony  that  has  come  to  my  knowledge  is  the  rose- 
bug  or  rose-chafer.  Sandy  soil  is  the  usual 
breeding  place  of  this  energetic  pest.  Clay  soil, 
unless  in  the  vicinity  of  sandy  soil,  is  seldom  in- 
fested. As  early  as  1810,  the  pernicious  activi- 
ties of  the  rose-bug  caused  anxiety  to  gardeners : 
in  recent  years  it  has  become  more  and  more  com- 
prehensive in  its  tastes  until  now  its  diet  includes 
not  only  roses,  but  many  other  garden  plants,  par- 
ticularly those  bearing  white  flowers.  Rose-bugs 
take  an  especial  gustatorial  delight  in  the  grape, 
but  in  seasons  when  they  are  numerous  they  de- 
vote their  energies  with  striking  impartiality  to 
other  fruits,  to  vegetables,  and  to  field  crops,  such 
as  corn  and  wheat.  The  rose-bug  is  now  such  a 
menace  that  it  has  become  the  subject  of  inves- 

170 


ASA  GRAY 
(Crousse,  1886) 
Semi-rose  type.     A  wonderful  shade  of  pink,  illumined  by  the  glow  of  its  golden  stamens, 
grower  and  a  profuse  bloomer 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

tigation  and  study  by  the  Federal  Government 
and  by  State  Experiment  Stations. 

The  consensus  of  opinion  is  that  no  way  of 
adequately  controlling  the  rose-bug  has  yet  been 
discovered.  Poisonous  sprays,  which  kill  other 
insects,  only  stupefy  the  tenacious  rose-bug. 
When  this  fact  looms  large,  one  is  inclined  to 
question,  with  James  Russell  Lowell,  "  whether 
Noah  was  justified  in  preserving  this  class  of 
insects ! " 

To  reduce  its  ravages,  two  practical  sugges- 
tions are  made: 

1.  Through  May  and  up  to  the  middle  of 
June,  the  ground  should  be  thoroughly  stirred 
to  the  depth  of  at  least  two  inches.  The  young 
of  the  rose-bug  are  very  delicate  and  are  easily 
killed  in  the  second  or  pupal  stage  of  their  growth 
when  developing  underground.  The  slightest 
disturbance  destroys  them. 

2.  When  once  the  beetles  have  appeared  in 
the  garden,  hand  picking  is  the  only  way  in  which 
to  dispose  of  them.  This  slow  and  wearisome 
proceeding  may  be  somewhat  hastened  if  a  few 
spiraeas  or  white  roses  are  planted  to  act  as  lures. 
The  rose-bugs  are  fond  of  these  plants  and  gather 

171 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

on  them  in  great  numbers.  It  is  then  compara- 
tively easy  to  collect  the  beetles  and  drop  them 
into  a  pan  of  death-dealing  kerosene. 

If  the  labour  of  hand  picking  is  too  arduous, 
peonies  may  be  protected  by  frames  covered  with 
netting. 

Fortunately  for  peony-lovers  near  New  York, 
the  early  and  many  of  the  mid-season  varieties 
are  usually  through  blooming  before  the  rose-bug 
makes  its  appearance. 

Ants  cause  no  direct  injury  to  peonies.  Al- 
though unpleasant,  they  are  dangerous  only  as 
carriers  of  spores  produced  on  sick  plants.  As 
plants  other  than  the  peony  are  also  victims  of 
various  fungoid  diseases,  it  is  the  part  of  wisdom 
to  watch  one's  garden  carefully,  and  to  remove 
promptly  and  burn  at  once  all  infected  foliage 
and  roots.  The  industrious  ant  will  then  make 
less  mischief.  As  a  further  precaution,  the  num- 
ber of  ants  can  be  much  reduced  by  the  destruction 
of  their  nests  with  boiling  water. 


172 


PROPAGATION 


CHAPTER  VIII 

PROPAGATION 

HERBACEOUS  peonies  are  usually  prop- 
agated in  two  ways:  1,  by  the  division  of 
roots,  which  method  increases  the  number  of 
plants  of  established  varieties,  and  2,  by  growing 
from  seeds,  which  method,  as  the  offspring  never 
come  true  to  either  parent,  produces  new  varieties. 

Division 
Professional  growers  select  stock  one,  two  or 
three  years  old  for  dividing.  Two-year-old  stock 
is  best.  The  use  of  young  roots  for  division  not 
only  saves  time  in  increasing  stock,  but  also  pro- 
duces plants  which  flower  more  freely.  Roots 
older  than  two  years  may  also  be  successfully 
divided  and  grown:  it  is  indeed  such  roots  which 
ordinarily  are  divided  in  private  gardens.  As  the 
amateur  grower  desires  to  have  blooms  he  leaves 
his  peonies  undisturbed  to  flower.  However,  if 
they  are  left  too  many  years  before  they  are 
divided,  the  new  stock  thus  secured  may  be  dis* 

175 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

appointing.  Divisions  from  old  clumps  some- 
times fail  to  flower  freely. 

Young  plants  have  straight  and  smooth  roots 
and  may  be  cut  up  easily  and  evenly;  the  older 
the  plant  the  more  difficult  is  the  process  of  divi- 
sion. The  peony  root  grows  so  large  and  strong 
that  after  a  few  years  it  often  becomes  a  mass 
of  interlaced  fleshy  roots.  In  dividing  such  roots 
there  is  necessarily  much  waste.  Other  kinds 
lend  themselves  to  division  much  more  easily. 
A  few  varieties  have  a  way  of  growing  in  sep- 
arate pieces,  each  piece  with  a  small  crown  of  its 
own,  a  characteristic  which  prevents  the  develop- 
ment of  a  fine  large  plant. 

The  condition  and  shape  of  the  roots  is  in- 
fluenced by  the  soil  in  which  they  have  grown. 
A  deep  and  friable  soil  will  produce  straighter 
roots  than  a  shallow  soil  underlain  with  a  hard 
subsoil.  One  grower  of  peonies  in  England  states 
that  he  has  found  peony  roots  in  his  garden  ex- 
tending down  to  a  distance  of  three  feet.  Ex- 
ploring roots  in  their  search  for  food  are  forced 
to  turn  and  twist  when  they  meet  an  unyielding 
subsoil. 

Before  lifting  the  roots  which  are  to  be  divided, 

176 


LA  TULIPE 
(Calot,  1872) 

Semi-rose  type.     This  large  ivory-white  flower  is  flushed  with  pink.     A  strong-growing,  desirable 
and  inexpensive  variety 


PROPAGATION 

the  leaves  and  stems  should  be  cut  off  to  the 
ground.  This  prevents  the  rapid  softening  of 
the  roots,  a  shock  to  the  plant  from  which  it  must 
recover  before  it  starts  to  grow  again.  The  soil 
should  be  removed  and  the  roots  divided  with  a 
sharp  knife  into  pieces  containing  from  three  to 
five  strong  buds  or  eyes,  with  a  generous  pro- 
portion of  fleshy  root.  I  find  that  a  hunting  knife 
with  a  six-inch  blade  is  safe  to  use  and  has  the 
requisite  strength  for  the  work. 

Scarce  and  valuable  kinds  are  cut  into  smaller 
pieces  so  that  only  one  bud  is  allotted  to  each 
piece.  If  such  a  fine  division  is  made  the  new 
plant  should  be  placed  in  a  cold  frame  for  the 
first  year,  as  much  to  keep  track  of  the  valuable 
root  as  to  protect  it:  such  procedure,  however, 
is  not  an  absolute  necessity. 

One  should  be  warned  against  too  minute  or 
too  frequent  division.  Roots  so  divided  seem 
to  lose  their  vitality :  it  may  be  a  long  time  before 
they  bloom,  if  they  do  not  succumb  entirely. 

If  in  the  work  of  dividing  roots  of  fine  vari- 
eties some  of  the  fleshy  pieces  are  broken  off  near 
the  crown,  it  is  well  worth  while  to  save  them. 
The  upper  part  of  a  fleshy  root  or  "  finger  "  will 

12  177 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

often  develop  buds  and  form  a  crown  of  its  own. 
The  chance  of  the  lower  part  of  a  root  finger 
making  any  growth  is  very  small. 

After  the  roots  are  cut  up  the  divisions  should 
be  planted  at  once ; *  but,  if  possible,  not  in  the 
same  soil  in  which  peonies  have  already  been 
grown.  Emphasis  should  be  laid  upon  this  point. 
Such  planting  is  often,  although  not  invariably, 
the  cause  of  failure  and  disappointment.  As 
peonies  require  much  nourishment,  they  exhaust 
to  an  unusual  degree  the  soil  in  which  they  grow. 
If  placed  in  exhausted  soil,  the  new  root,  suffer- 
ing from  the  shock  of  division  and  transplant- 
ing, is  at  a  great  disadvantage :  many  so  planted 
have  failed  ever  to  bloom. 

A  peony  should  not  be  planted  in  ground 
that  has  been  previously  occupied  by  one  that 
was  diseased. 

If  it  is  necessary  for  the  sake  of  garden  design 
or  effect  to  place  a  peony  where  one  was  growing 

1  One  prominent  grower  has  recently  tried  the 
method  of  placing  the  newly  divided  roots,  lightly  cov- 
ered with  paper,  in  a  cool,  dark  place  for  a  day  or  two 
and  letting  the  cuts  become  somewhat  callous  before 
replanting.  His  object  in  doing  this  is  to  lessen  the 
possible  danger  of  rotting. 

178 


PROPAGATION 

before,  the  soil  can  be  entirely  removed  to  a  depth 
of  two  and  a  half  feet  and  replaced  with  fresh  soil. 

Raising  Peonies  from  Seed 
The  growing  of  peonies  from  seed  is  a  most 
fascinating  pursuit.  As  the  seedlings  are  never 
the  same  as  the  parents  the  possibility  of  new 
and  more  beautiful  varieties  is  a  constant  hope 
and  a  glowing  enticement.  This  possibility  ap- 
peals strongly  to  the  wish  to  create  which  exists 
in  every  normal  human  being.  The  number  of 
yellow  peonies  or  peonies  in  which  yellow  is  notice- 
able is  very  limited.  A  glorious  yellow  peony 
that  will  hold  its  colour  for  more  than  a  few  hours 
is  one  of  the  ambitions  of  a  number  of  peony 
lovers.  Many  of  the  pink  peonies  would  be  love- 
lier had  they  less  of  a  bluish  tinge.  Here  are 
tasks  for  the  enthusiastic  amateur.  And  success 
in  accomplishing  them  can  be  attained  through 
seedlings  alone. 

Peony  seeds  harden  rapidly  after  ripening 
and  when  they  have  once  fully  dried  it  is  prac- 
tically impossible  to  make  them  germinate  in  less 
than  two  years.  Frequently  they  require  even 
a  longer  time.    In  order  to  avoid  the  delay  caused 

179 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

by  this  dryness  and  hardness  the  seeds  must  be 
gathered  just  as  they  are  turning  brown  and  must 
be  planted  immediately.  They  should  be  planted 
about  two  inches  deep  in  friable  loam.  The  tiny 
seedlings  will  usually  appear  the  following  Spring, 
although  some  of  them  may  be  more  deliberate. 
The  seeds  may  be  planted  successfully  either  in 
the  open  or  in  boxes  which  are  about  six  inches 
deep  and  which  are  placed  in  cold  frames.  If 
planted  in  boxes  they  should  have  plenty  of  air 
and  moisture,  and  should  be  given  partial  shade 
to  prevent  drying  out.  At  the  end  of  a  year's 
growth  in  the  box  the  seedlings  should  be  trans- 
planted. They  may  be  grown  in  boxes  another 
year  if  desired,  but  after  the  first  transplanting 
they  make  more  rapid  growth  if  planted  out- 
doors. When  these  new  peonies  are  three  or 
four  years  old  the  anxious  gardener  may  reason- 
ably expect  them  to  bloom.  Sad  to  relate,  it  is 
seldom  that  more  than  one  in  a  thousand  of  the 
seedlings  approaches  the  standards  of  the  old  and 
established  varieties.  The  thrill  of  having  grown 
them  blots  out  this  horrid  realization  for  a  while. 
But  the  cruel  fact  that  seeds  pollinated  with  the 
casual  assistance  of  bees  and  other  insects  gener- 

180 


UNNAMED  SEEDLING   OF   HERBACEOUS  PEONY,   SINGLE  TYPE 


PROPAGATION 

ally  produee  peonies  inferior  to  those  which  we 
already  have,  is  becoming  widely  appreciated. 
There  promises  to  be  a  more  definite  effort  to 
raise  only  those  seeds  which  are  the  result  of  a 
careful  selection  of  the  parents  and  of  hand 
pollination. 

Hand  Pollination 

Many  beautiful  peonies  which  have  been  de- 
veloped within  the  last  fifteen  years  are  the  result 
of  careful  cross-breeding.  Although  the  breed- 
ing of  plants  is  in  itself  a  life  study,  there  is  no 
reason  why  the  amateur  may  not,  with  a  little 
knowledge,  enjoy  some  of  its  delights  and 
rewards. 

The  first  thing  for  the  novice  to  learn  is  the 
construction  of  the  flower  which  he  wishes  to 
breed.  A  flower  is  usually  composed  of  two  sets 
of  organs — the  non-essential  and  the  essential. 
The  non-essential  are  (1)  the  calyx  or  green  cup 
at  the  base  of  the  flower,  composed  of  sepals,  and 
(2)  the  corolla,  composed  of  petals.  The  essen- 
tial organs  are  (3)  the  pistil  and  (4)  the  stamens. 
The  pistil  has  three  parts,  the  stigma,  on  which 
the  pollen  or  fertilizing  dust  is  placed,  the  ovary, 
which  contains  the  seeds,  and  the  style  or  slender 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

tube  which  carries  the  pollen  from  the  stigma  to 
the  ovary.  The  peony  has  a  compound  pistil,  the 
component  parts  of  which  are  called  carpels. 
Each  carpel  is  composed  of  a  single  cell  contain- 
ing many  seeds,  and  the  style  or  extension  of  the 
ovary.  A  groove  runs  along  the  inner  side  of 
the  carpel.  This  groove  contains  tiny  stigmatic 
nodules  or  protuberances. 

Both  pistil  and  stamens  are  to  be  found  in 
the  peony.  The  stamens,  which  are  usually  nu- 
merous, surround  the  pistil.  In  peonies  which 
have  entered  into  the  process  of  doubling,  the 
stamens  may  be  found  amongst  the  petals 
throughout  the  flower.  The  stamens  are  in  two 
parts:  (1)  the  anthers  or  cells  full  of  yellowish 
powder  or  pollen,  and  (2)  the  filaments  or  slender 
stems  supporting  the  anthers.  The  anthers  are 
composed  of  two  long,  narrow  cells  which  open 
when  the  pollen  is  ripe. 

Cross-breeding  or  cross-pollination  consists  of 
securing  the  fertilisation  of  the  seed  cells  of  one 
peony  by  placing  upon  the  nodule-covered  groove 
of  the  carpels  the  pollen  obtained  from  the  anthers 
of  another  peony. 

The  two  flowers  which  have  been  selected 
for  cross-breeding  should  be  carefully  protected 

182 


.    - 

^P^-/f  ^'/i 

>•* 

-  i'^2fe£~5 

jfc 

Rose  type. 


MADAME  JULES  DESSERT 
(Dessert,  1909) 
One  of  the  newer  peonies,  white  tinged  with  straw  and  flesh  coloi 


PROPAGATION 

to  avoid  other  pollination  than  that  desired.  For 
this  purpose  oiled  paper  bags  may  be  placed  over 
the  flowers  and  secured  with  wire  or  string.  The 
anthers  on  the  flower  which  is  to  be  pollinated 
should  be  removed  as  soon  as  possible,  in  order 
to  prevent  self-fertilisation.  Every  care  should 
be  exercised  in  removing  the  anthers  to  avoid 
cutting  or  bruising  the  carpels.  Some  of  the 
petals  may  be  removed  to  facilitate  the  work.  The 
stigmas  should  be  watched  to  observe  when  they 
are  ready  to  receive  the  pollen.  When  the  stigmas 
present  a  waxy  granulated  surface  they  are  ready. 
The  pollen  should  then  be  taken  from  the  anthers 
of  the  pollen  parent  flower  and  applied  to  the 
receptive  stigmas.  This  may  be  done  in  a  number 
of  ways.  The  ripe  anther  may  be  crushed  upon 
the  thumb  nail  of  the  operator  or  upon  a  watch 
crystal  or  other  small  receptacle.  By  means  of 
a  tiny  scalpel,  camel's-hair  brush  or  the  operator's 
finger  tips  the  pollen  may  then  be  placed  upon 
the  stigmas,  which  should  be  covered  generously. 
Opinions  differ  as  to  whether  the  paper  bag  should 
or  should  not  be  replaced  after  the  operation  is 
finished.  In  case  the  bag  is  replaced,  it  should 
be  left  only  until  the  stigmas  have  withered.  A 
tag  bearing  the  names  of  the  parent  varieties 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

(the  name  of  the  ovule  parent  appearing  first  in 
order)  should  be  securely  fastened  to  the  stem. 

In  crossing  some  varieties  there  often  arises 
the  difficulty  of  finding  both  stigmas  and  anthers 
ready  for  breeding  at  the  same  time.  Ripe  pollen 
may  be  kept  in  dry,  air-tight  paper  bags  for  a 
week  or  more,  but  the  fresher  the  pollen  the  more 
vitality  it  has.  A  peony  may  be  forced  by  plant- 
ing it  in  a  frame,  keeping  from  frost  all  Winter, 
and  in  the  early  Spring  placing  under  sash.  Forc- 
ing in  a  greenhouse  may  also  be  employed. 

The  equipment  for  cross-breeding  should  in- 
clude a  strong  magnifying  glass,  a  pair  of  fine 
long-handled  scissors,  a  scalpel  or  a  camel's-hair 
brush  and  a  small  receptacle  for  holding  the  pol- 
len.    Some  hybridisers  use  a  jeweller's  eyeglass. 

Single  and  semi-double  varieties  of  peonies 
produce  seeds  most  freely.  Full  double  varieties 
seldom  bear  any  seeds.  In  cross-breeding  peonies, 
those  two  varieties  which  present  most  nearly  the 
desired  characteristics  should  be  chosen,  for  in 
cross-breeding  between  varieties  lies  the  means 
of  strengthening  a  type  and  producing  variations. 
Breeding  between  individual  flowers  on  the  same 
plant  generally  produces  nothing  of  value. 


184 


THE  TREE  PEONY- 
DESCRIPTION  AND  HISTORY 


CHAPTER  IX 

THE  TREE  PEONY— DESCRIPTION 
AND  HISTORY 

RMOUTAN— the  tree  peony — differs  from 
,  the  herbaceous  peony  in  having  woody 
stems  that  do  not  die  down  to  the  ground  in  the 
Autumn.  This  is  the  most  noticeable  structural 
difference.  The  leaves  are  dissimilar  in  outline 
from  and  are  usually  of  a  paler  shade  of  green 
than  those  of  the  herbaceous  peony  (albiflora 
type) .  The  buds  are  much  larger  and  flatter  and 
are  raised  to  a  sharp  point  in  the  centre.  They 
lack  any  honey  secretion  and  are  of  the  same 
colour  as  the  leaves. 

The  tree  peony  is  like  the  herbaceous  in  that 
its  flowers  have  both  single  and  double  forms. 
The  flowers  of  the  tree  peony,  however,  usually 
attain  a  larger  size. 

While  the  tree  peony  has  much  in  common 
with  the  herbaceous  peony,  it  has  so  much  that  is 
distinct  that  I  have  thought  best  to  treat  it  sep- 
arately.    The  tree  peony  has  a  more  extended 

187 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

history  and  wider  cultivation  in  the  Orient  than 
the  herbaceous  kinds :  in  Europe  and  America  the 
reverse  is  the  case. 

The  Tree  Peony  in  China 
In  the  Sixth  Century,  a.d.,  the  Chinese  dis- 
tinguished two  kinds  of  peonies — the  Mow  Tan,1 
or  improved  kind,  the  present  P.  moutan,  and 
the  Sho  Yo,  or  common  kind,  the  ancestors  or 
one  of  the  ancestors  of  the  present  P.  albiflora. 
The  Mow  Tans,  the  more  beautiful  of  the  two, 
were  called  Hwa  Wang — The  King  of  Flowers 
— and  the  Sho  Yo  were  called  Hwa  Leang — The 
Ministers  of  the  King. 

A  Chinese  author,  writing  in  536  a.d.,  says 
that  the  original  native  country  of  the  moutan 
was  the  eastern  part  of  the  province  of  Sze-Chuan 
and  the  adjacent  southern  part  of  the  province 
of  Shen-Si  (western  China — centre — about  the 
latitude  of  South  Carolina).    In  656,  this  state- 

1  Mow  Tan  means  "  male  scarlet  flower."  It  was 
so  called  "  because  of  its  propagation  being  principally 
effected  by  dividing  the  root  and  because  the  scarlet 
flower  was  considered  the  principal  one."  The  moutan 
was  also  known  as  Muh  Sho  Yo — "  tree-like  most 
beautiful." 


• 


PORCELAIN   OF  THE   KANG   HSI   PERIOD   (1662-1796) 

The  chief  decoration  of   this   vase  is  peonies.     The  green   peony   is  so  coloured 

through   artistic   license.     The   vase   belongs   to   the   Altman    collection   in    the 

Metropolitan  Museum  of  Art 


THE  TREE  PEONY 

ment  was  corroborated — or  copied  and  accepted  as 
true — by  a  Chinese  writer  on  natural  philosophy. 
Prior  to  600,  the  peony  was  used  by  the 
Chinese  chiefly  for  medicinal  purposes.  About 
this  date,  during  the  reign  of  the  Emperor  Yang 
Te — connoisseur  in  many  things — the  tree  peony 
was  introduced  into  gardens  as  an  ornamental 
plant.  By  700,  according  to  an  old  Chinese  work 
on  "  The  Origin  of  Things  and  Matters,"  the 
number  of  sorts  grown  had  greatly  increased  and 
the  plant  was  found  near  the  huts  of  the  poor  as 
well  as  around  the  houses  of  the  rich.  Soon  after 
this,  the  growing  of  peonies  had  become  so  im- 
portant that  Gow  Yang  Sew  established  a  gene- 
alogical register  (Mow  tan  poo)  in  which  to 
record  the  parentage  and  characteristics  of  the 
kinds  that  were  grown  from  seed.  The  first 
botanical  garden  recorded  in  history  goes  back  to 
the  time  of  Queen  Hatasu  in  Egypt,  about  1500 
B.C.  (the  Garden  of  Eden,  though  doubtless  com- 
plete in  the  varieties  of  the  time,  did  not,  so  far 
as  we  know,  include  any  scheme  of  classification) ; 
but  this  Chinese  pedigree  book  is  the  earliest  in- 
stance I  have  found  of  a  common  or  garden  tree 
having  a  family  tree  of  its  own.    Thirty  differ- 

189 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 
ent   peonies  were   described  under  names   that 
allude  to  their  origin  or  colour  or  are  the  names 
of  distinguished  persons. 

During  the  Tang  Dynasty  (618-906  a.d.) 
the  peony  acquired  an  extraordinary  fashion  and 
commanded  extremely  high  prices.  Poets  began 
to  write  about  it  and  emperors  placed  it  under 
their  protection.  The  fields  where  it  was  grown 
were  consecrated  by  inscriptions  of  a  religious  en- 
thusiasm. Its  culture  was  the  favourite  amuse- 
ment of  the  nobility,  the  literary  and  the  rich. 
Some  varieties  were  held  far  above  the  ordinary 
rates  of  barter:  one  kind,  called  Pe-Leang-Kin — 
one  hundred  ounces  of  gold — and  sold  for  that 
amount,  gives  one  an  idea  to  what  extent  the 
passion  for  the  peony  went.  Some  were  regarded 
as  heirlooms;  and  not  infrequently  a  prize  plant 
was  offered  as  a  portion  of  the  marriage  dowry. 

When  the  Emperor  Yong-Lo  of  the  Ming 
Dynasty  moved  the  court  to  Pekin  at  the  end  of 
the  Fourteenth  Century,  he  commanded  that  peo- 
nies be  brought  each  year  from  How-Kow-ang. 
On  their  arrival  a  solemn  presentation  was 
held.  This  ceremony  was  continued  for  several 
centuries. 

190 


THE  TREE  PEONY 

The  tree  peonies  grown  in  China  were  white, 
pink,  red,  lilac  and,  it  is  stated  by  some  writers, 
yellow.  The  wish  for  a  yellow  peony  has  been 
present  in  the  heart  of  man  for  many  hundred 
years.  So  great  was  the  desire  of  the  Chinese 
for  this  colour  that  they  employed  many  schemes 
to  procure  it :  dyes  were  poured  on  the  roots  and 
white  flowers  were  wrapped  in  yellow  paper  with 
the  hope  that  the  petals  would  take  up  the  colour. 

Peonies  were  grown  in  the  natural  shape  of 
bushes,  or  were  trained  on  espaliers  in  various 
designs.  Through  careful  retarding  or  forcing, 
they  were  made  to  bloom  in  summer  and  autumn 
as  well  as  in  the  spring. 

In  the  art  and  literature  of  China  the  tree 
peony  has  held  a  conspicuous  place.  In  ceramics, 
textile  and  pictorial  art  and  in  poetry  and  prose 
the  peony  was  an  honoured  motive  or  subject. 
The  beauty  of  the  colour  and  form  of  the  flower 
has  during  many  centuries  made  an  irresistible 
appeal  to  the  most  cultured  inhabitants  of  the 
Flowery  Kingdom. 

In  Chinese  art,  each  of  the  twelve  months  of 
the  year  was  represented  by  a  flower — plum  for 
January,  peach  for  February,  tree  peony  for 

191 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

March,  double  cherry  for  April,  magnolia  for 
May,  pomegranate  for  June,  lotus  for  July,  pear 
for  August,  mallow  for  September,  chrysanthe- 
mum for  October,  gardenia  for  November  and 
poppy  for  December.  From  the  three  flowers 
for  the  months  of  each  season,  one  was  selected 
as  emblematical  of  the  entire  season — the  tree 
peony  for  Spring,  the  lotus  for  Summer,  the 
chrysanthemum  for  Autumn  and  the  plum  for 
Winter.  These  four  appear  as  the  favourite 
flowers  in  all  the  different  forms  of  Chinese  art. 
They  are  frequently  used  in  ceramics,  particularly 
in  the  decoration  of  the  four  faces  of  a  quad- 
rangular vase  or  the  four  side  panels  of  a  bowl. 
In  the  patterns  of  velvets,  brocades  and  woven 
silks  they  occur  again  and  again. 

Phoenixes,  pheasants  and  peacocks  are  often 
depicted  with  the  peony  as  are  storks  with  the 
pine,  swallows  with  the  willow  and  quail  with 
millet.  It  was  considered  appropriate  that  the 
phcenix,  the  king  of  all  the  birds,  should  appear 
with  the  peony,  the  king  of  all  the  flowers.  This 
combination  was  embroidered  with  exquisite  skill 
on  articles  of  the  trousseaux  of  the  imperial 
princesses. 

192 


THE  TREE  PEONY 

In  some  instances  a  cock  is  shown  with  the 
peony — the  association  being  based  on  the  fact 
that  both  had  been  held  in  high  regard  from  the 
earliest  times.  The  lion — a  favourite  subject  of 
Chinese  ceramic  art — is  usually  pictured  with 
elaborately  curled  and  dressed  mane,  disporting 
joyously  among  peony  flowers:  apparently  even 
the  animals  in  those  days  appreciated  peonies. 

In  the  Han  Period  (206  b.c-220  a.d.),  when 
all  the  arts  were  still  in  their  infancy,  I  find  no 
decorations  of  peonies  on  pottery.  In  the  crude 
bas-reliefs  of  the  time,  there  are  birds  which  are 
unmistakably  phoenixes  and  trees  or  flowers  which 
by  a  slight  exercise  of  the  imagination  may  be 
considered  peonies.  The  bas-relief  of  the  family 
of  Wu  at  Shantung,  147  a.d.,  is  an  example. 

In  the  Sung  Period  (960-1279  a.d.),  among 
the  molded  designs  used  in  ceramics  were 
phoenixes  flying  among  peonies.  Brocaded  pat- 
terns composed  of  interlacing  sprays  of  tree  peo- 
nies and  lilies  often  occur.  A  spray  of  lotus  or 
peony  was  sometimes  engraved  under  the  glaze 
of  dishes. 

In  the  Ming  Period  (1368-1644  a.d.),  when 
Chinese  pottery  and  porcelain  reached  a  high 

13  193 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

period  of  development,  the  peony  was  well  repre- 
sented in  numerous  pieces  which  were  decorated 
in  colour. 

In  the  advance  in  ceramic  art  which  culmi- 
nated in  the  Kang  Hsi  Period  (1662-1796  a.d.), 
the  peony  was  used  more  and  more  frequently 
as  a  theme  and  was  portrayed  with  greater  beauty 
and  fidelity.  To  show  the  peony  as  it  appears 
on  what  is  generally  considered  to  be  the  most 
wonderful  porcelain  the  world  has  ever  seen,  I 
have  reproduced  in  colour  a  vase  of  this  period 
( see  colour  plate) .  The  vase  is  one  of  the  Altman 
collection  and  has  a  value  of  many  thousand 
dollars. 

The  Tree  Peony  in  Japan 
About  the  time  of  the  establishing  of  the  gene- 
alogical register  in  China,  many  tree  peonies  were 
taken  to  Japan.  Under  the  name  Botan  (prob- 
ably the  same  word  as  moutan),  they  at  once 
became  great  favourites  as  ornamental  plants — 
a  popularity  that  has  continued  to  the  present 
time.  The  medicinal  qualities  of  the  plant  were 
soon  known  to  the  Japanese  and  in  time  the  cul- 
ture of  the  tree  peony  for  sale  as  a  remedy  grew 

194 


THE  TREE  PEONY 

into  a  considerable  industry.  The  provinces  of 
Yomato  and  Yamasiro  (about  the  same  latitude 
as,  but  much  nearer  the  sea  than,  Shen-si — the 
moutan's  original  habitat)  furnished  the  market 
with  large  quantities  of  bark  and  roots.  The 
drug  made  from  the  peony  apparently  does  not 
possess  the  same  fascination  as  a  dispeller  of  care 
or  a  producer  of  joy  as  opium  or  hasheesh:  smok- 
ing or  taking  it  has  never  become  a  national  vice 
in  either  China  or  Japan. 

The  district  of  Nara  in  Yomato  was  famous 
for  its  magnificent  flowering  plants,  some  of  which 
brought  as  much  as  fifty  dollars  apiece.  The  best 
specimens  came  from  the  districts  near  Tokio  and 
Yokohama,  where  the  colder  climate  produced 
flowers  that  had  better  colour  and  substance. 

The  tree  peony  was  the  subject  of  much  pa- 
tient care  and  clever  experimenting.  About  1700 
a.d.,  Ito  Ifui,  a  Japanese  gardener,  agile  with 
both  spade  and  pen,  wrote  detailed  and  extended 
instructions  for  the  culture  of  the  tree  peony 
which  included  propagating  from  cuttings  and 
some  methods  of  grafting. 

The  Japanese  take  a  pride  in  the  tree  peony 
that  is  second  only  to  that  taken  in  the  chrys- 

195 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

anthemum.  On  the  eighty-eighth  day  after  Janu- 
ary first  the  Japanese  farmer  starts  his  agricul- 
tural operations  for  the  year.  Shortly  after  this 
important  event  the  tree  peony  comes  into  bloom 
and  flower  shows  for  it  are  held  over  the  entire 
country.  In  some  of  these  exhibitions  as  many 
as  five  thousand  plants  of  varying  colours  are 
arranged  in  tier  upon  tier  of  brilliancy. 

The  tree  peony  is  classed  with  the  iris,  lotus 
and  wistaria  as  the  most  important  flowers  of 
summer.  The  peony,  the  cherry  and  the  lotus 
are  the  three  flowers  to  which  is  attributed  royal 
rank.  The  tree  peony  was  often  called  the 
Flower  of  Prosperity  and  occasionally  the  Plant 
of  Twenty  Days,  because  of  the  long  time  dur- 
ing which  the  flowers  preserved  their  beauty  and 
freshness. 

The  tree  peony  and  chrysanthemum  are  not 
used  in  the  landscape  garden  proper.  Their  dis- 
play is  restricted  to  flower  beds  arranged  in  long- 
sheltered  areas  which  are  usually  placed  near  the 
apartments  of  the  ladies.  In  the  grounds  of  the 
palaces  peonies  adorn  the  open  spaces  facing  the 
ladies'  chambers  from  which  the  beauty  of  the 
flowers  can  be  readily  viewed. 

196 


THE  TREE  PEONY 

The  peony  was  much  cherished  by  the  upper 
classes,  who  gave  it  "  scrupulous  care  and  nurs- 
ing "  in  order  to  produce  flowers  of  enormous 
size.  This  care  included,  according  to  Ito  Ifui, 
the  rubbing  of  the  stems  with  camellia  oil  in  order 
to  free  the  bark  of  lichens  and  moss! 

In  Japanese  art  the  plum  blossom  is  insep- 
arably connected  with  the  nightingale.  Similar 
combinations  of  bird  and  flower  or  beast  and 
flower  are  found  in  the  many  designs  of  the 
country,  as,  for  example,  bamboo  leaves  and  spar- 
rows, deer  and  maple  leaves,  peonies  and  peafowl. 

The  "  exuberant  flower  "  of  the  peony,  with 
its  long,  curling  petals,  was  a  favourite  subject  in 
art.  With  peacock  or  Shishi — a  kind  of  conven- 
tional lion  derived  from  the  Chinese — the  peony 
forms  the  constant  decoration  of  temple  and 
palace  walls. 

As  the  peony  was  given  royal  rank  and  was 
regarded  as  the  queen  of  all  flowering  plants,  it 
had  to  be  used  alone  in  any  indoor  flower  arrange- 
ment and  had  to  be  placed  in  the  position  of 
honour  in  the  room,  that  is,  on  the  dais  of  the 
principal  recess. 

The  peony  has  a  place  in  the  religion  of  the 

197 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

Japanese.  In  Shintoism,  there  is  a  festival  called 
Bommatsuri,  celebrated  on  July  13-15  in  each 
year,  which  corresponds  to  our  All  Saints'  Day. 
At  this  time  departed  spirits  return  for  a  brief 
earthly  sojourn.  Elaborate  ceremonies  are  held 
in  each  house.  Choice  d1shes  are  prepared  and  at 
night  the  way  is  lighted  for  the  spirits  by  persons 
carrying  "  peony  lanterns,"  which  consist  of 
candles  fastened  in  the  centre  of  artificial  peonies 
made  of  paper  or  silk  and  swung  by  a  fine  wire 
bale  on  the  end  of  a  long  pole.2 

The  affection  of  the  Japanese  people  for  the 
peony  is  shown  by  the  numerous  legends  and  bits 
of  folk-lore  concerning  it,  all  of  which  are  marked 
by  a  charming  symbolism.  In  many  of  these  the 
soul  of  the  peony  inhabits  a  body  which  is  appar- 
ently human,  but  which  suddenly  disappears  on 
sufficient  provocation.  In  one  legend,  a  Japa- 
nese scholar  made  the  cultivation  of  peonies  his 
sole  recreation.  On  a  sunny  morning  a  beautiful 
woman  clothed  in  purest  white  appeared  at  his 
door,  and  asked  permission  to  become  a  member 

2  Lafcadio  Hearn  described  another  kind  of  peony 
lantern  made  by  attaching  to  the  top  of  a  festival  lan- 
tern artificial  peonies  of  silk. 


THE  TREE  PEONY 

of  his  household.  On  account  of  her  loveliness 
the  request  was  granted.  For  days,  contented 
and  happy,  she  joined  in  tending  the  treasured 
peonies.  During  a  terrible  storm,  a  dark,  mys- 
terious stranger  sought  shelter  in  the  house.  On 
seeing  him  the  woman  ran  in  fear.  When  the 
scholar  followed  her  she  fell  to  the  ground,  appar- 
ently in  a  swoon;  he  stooped  to  lift  her,  but  she 
faded  before  his  very  eyes  and  vanished.  She 
was  the  Spirit  of  the  Peony.  When  next  the 
scholar  went  into  the  garden  he  found  that  all 
his  peonies  had  been  destroyed  by  the  rain. 

The  Tree  Peony  in  England 
Although  known  in  England  in  1669  nothing 
was  done  to  import  the  tree  peony  into  that  coun- 
try until  the  latter  part  of  the  Nineteenth  Cen- 
tury. From  Chinese  drawings  and  from  praises 
bestowed  on  the  plant  in  books,  an  "  ardent  desire 
was  excited  in  Sir  Joseph  Banks — the  head  of 
the  Royal  Botanical  Gardens  at  Kew — and  others 
to  obtain  some  of  the  plants."  In  1786  Sir  Joseph 
commissioned  Mr.  Duncan — "  a  medical  gentle- 
man attached  to  the  East  India  Company's  ser- 
vice " — to  procure  a  plant  for  Kew.     This  was 

199 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

done  and  the  first  tree  peony  in  England  was 
seen  at  the  Royal  Garden  in  1787.  The  plant 
P.  Banksii,  which  had  flesh  pink  double  flowers, 
and  several  others  which  were  received  from  time 
to  time,  uniformly  failed  to  thrive — due  probably, 
as  one  English  writer  surmises,  to  being  too 
rapidly  forced  as  "  stove  "  plants. 

In  1794  a  fresh  supply  of  tree  peonies  was 
purchased  in  Canton  and  sent  to  England.  Ow- 
ing to  the  long  voyage  and  improper  packing, 
many  of  these  died  en  route:  only  three  plants 
survived  the  trip.  On  arrival  at  Kew,  the  three 
were  successfully  grown  outdoors,  propagated, 
and  distributed  in  British  collections.  These  peo- 
nies had  deep  pink  flowers  and  were  named  Rosea. 
Later  many  other  importations  were  made  con- 
sisting of  the  above  varieties  and  the  Papaveracea 
or  poppy-flowered  peony.  For  a  time  high  prices 
were  paid  for  the  plants. 

In  1838,  a  monograph  on  the  peony  describes 
only  the  tree  peonies  I  have  mentioned,  but  in 
1850  there  were  a  dozen  distinct  kinds  in  cultiva- 
tion in  England.  Some  of  these  had  probably 
been  raised  from  seed  obtained  from  the  three 
original  varieties  imported.    The  Earl  of  Mount 

200 


THE  TREE  PEONY 

Morris  and  the  Earl  of  Sandwich  both  took  a 
great  interest  in  the  tree  peony  and  produced 
several  distinct  sorts  from  the  Papaveracea. 

In  1860  the  English  gardens  were  chiefly  sup- 
plied by  French  growers.  In  the  English  maga- 
zines of  the  eighties  there  are  references  to  "  Whit- 
sun  roses,"  which  was  the  popular  name  by  which 
the  tree  peony  was  then  known  to  the  trade. 

For  some  time  past,  the  English  appear  to 
have  wanted  a  blue  peony  above  all  others.  In 
about  1875  this  colour  is  referred  to  as  being 
the  most  highly  desired.  In  1880,  Robert  Fortune 
was  commissioned  by  the  Royal  Horticultural 
Society  to  find  a  blue  peony.  After  much  search- 
ing in  China,  he  succeeded  in  finding  a  moutan 
with  lilac  flowers — which  seems  to  be  the  nearest 
to  the  ideal  yet  realized. 

About  1870  an  English  nurseryman  collected 
seeds  of  all  the  varieties  in  commerce  and  started 
propagation  of  tree  peonies.  These  plants  have 
gradually  been  grown  by  more  and  more  persons. 
In  1890  it  was  said  that  the  sorts  offered  could  be 
counted  by  the  hundreds.  At  the  present  time 
English  growers  list  no  less  than  one  hundred  and 
ten  different  kinds. 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

Although  there  are  numerous  instances  of  tree 
peonies  not  thriving  in  England,  they  are  cul- 
tivated successfully  in  many  parts  of  that  coun- 
try. Failure  to  grow  well  has  probably  been  due 
to  local  conditions. 

I  find  the  mention  of  one  tree  peony  in  Eng- 
land in  1835  that  "  perfected  "  320  flowers  in 
one  season.  There  are  statements  here  and  there 
about  occasional  specimens  noted  for  their  huge 
size  and  their  abundance  of  bloom.  One  plant  in 
particular,  grown  in  the  garden  of  E.  Taylor, 
Diss,  Norfolk,  is  famous  for  its  long  life  and 
sturdy  growth.  In  1904,  when  eighty  years  old, 
it  was  fifteen  feet  across  and  produced  400  flowers 
from  eight  to  nine  inches  in  diameter. 

It  is  stated  by  one  writer  that  the  "  re-intro- 
duction "  of  the  tree  peony  in  England  was 
mainly  due  to  T.  S.  Ware  of  Tottenham,  whose 
display  of  the  flowers  was  always  a  great  feature. 

The  Tree  Peony  in  America 

We  have  no  exact  knowledge  as  to  the  date 

when  the  tree  peony  was   introduced  into  the 

United  States.    Hovey  (writing  in  1836)  thinks 

it  must  have  been  about  1820.    In  1826,  a  plant 


THE  TREE  PEONY 

of  P.  moutan,  var.  papavaracea,  was  imported 
from  England  by  William  Lathe  of  Cambridge- 
port — probably  a  wise  and  public-spirited  move, 
for  if  ever  a  place  (from  its  present  appearance) 
needed  brightening  up  it  must  have  been  Cam- 
bridgeport.3 

In  1828  the  catalogue  of  John  Bartram  lists 
the  same  variety,  adding  "  poppy  flowered  tree 
pasony,"  but  without  price,  and  "  P.  moutan  rosea, 
rose  coloured,"  at  five  dollars.  William  Prince's 
catalogue  for  the  following  year  for  the  Linnasan 
Botanic  Garden  at  Flushing,  Long  Island,  sets 
out  these  varieties  and  also  P.  moutan  Banksi 
"  Chinese  purple  tree  peeony  with  magnificent 
fragrant  flowers,"  all  at  five  dollars  apiece.  So 
even  in  the  days  when  the  high  cost  of  living  was 
not  a  vital  issue  tree  peonies  were  not  an  inex- 
pensive hobby. 

In  1836  Colonel  Perkins  of  Brookline,  Massa- 
chusetts, imported  direct  from  China  a  tree  peony, 
which  was  thought  to  have  been  P.  moutan  Raw- 

3  It  is  an  historical  fact  that  this  peony  was  later 
moved  from  Cambridgeport  to  the  place  of  J.  P.  Cushing, 
Watertown,  Mass. 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

sei.  At  the  same  date  a  Mr.  Wilder  of  Dorches- 
ter is  recorded  as  the  owner  of  several  of  the  latest 
seedlings  which  he  had  received  from  France. 

In  1862,  Prince,  at  great  trouble  and  expense, 
obtained  some  twenty  varieties  of  tree  peonies 
from  European  gardens  and  introduced  them  at 
Flushing.  He  says,  in  that  year:  "  I  have  also 
originated  from  seeds  during  the  past  fifteen  years 
twenty-two  most  gorgeous  varieties,  whose  flow- 
ers are  of  the  largest  size,  and  comprising  white, 
roseate,  crimson,  lilac,  purple  and  variegated 
shades." 

At  the  present  time  there  are  a  few  gardens 
in  this  country  in  which  the  tree  peony  is  made 
an  important  feature.  It  is  not,  however,  grown 
in  the  United  States  nearly  as  widely  as  in  Eng- 
land and  France.  Its  charms  are  not  well  known 
to  the  gardener,  it  does  not  make  the  same  senti- 
mental appeal  that  the  herbaceous  peony  does, 
and  it  is  not  offered  so  freely  by  the  nurseries. 
Some  houses  do  not  list  it  at  all,  others  sparingly. 
As  an  example  two  large  growers  of  herbaceous 
peonies  each  catalogue  less  than  a  dozen  varieties 
of  P.  moutan.    As  the  plant  has  such  wonderful 

204 


THE  TREE  PEONY 

beauty  and  such  an  interesting  historical  back- 
ground, more  discriminating  amateurs  will,  as 
time  goes  on,  probably  come  to  include  it  among 
their  cherished  floral  treasures.4 


4  Since  the  above  was  written,  Mr.  B.  H.  Farr  has 
imported  a  collection  of  over  two  thousand  tree  peonies, 
which  will  undoubtedly  be  the  beginning  here  of  a  wider 
acquaintance  with  this  beautiful  plant. 


205 


TREE  PEONIES: 

CULTIVATION,  PROPAGATION 

AND  BEST  VARIETIES 


CHAPTER  X 

TREE  PEONIES:    CULTIVATION,  PROPAGATION 
AND  BEST  VARIETIES 

Location  and  Soil 

IN  growing  tree  peonies,  location  and  soil  are 
important.  The  tree  peony  should  always  be 
planted  at  a  distance  from  trees  or  shrubs  and 
sheltered  from  the  north  and  east  winds.  A 
friable  and  rich  vegetable  garden  soil,  similar  to 
that  which  should  be  provided  for  herbaceous 
peonies,  is  best.  If  the  ground  is  poor  it  should 
be  made  fertile  by  the  addition  of  well-rotted 
manure  or  compost.  The  suggestions  given  for 
herbaceous  peonies  in  Chapter  VI  under  the  head- 
ing, "  How  to  Prepare  the  Soil,"  apply  with 
equal  force  to  P.  moutan.  Observant  gardeners 
have  noticed  that  soils  in  which  there  is  consider- 
able iron  are  particularly  suited  to  growing  tree 
peonies.  Where  the  iron  is  deficient,  the  applica- 
tion of  a  small  quantity — preferably  in  the  form 
of  the  sulphate — is  of  value  in  producing  vigour 
in  the  plant  and  depth  of  colour  in  the  blooms. 

14  209 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

In  addition  to  proper  location  and  good  soil, 
drainage  is  most  necessary :  excessive  moisture  en- 
courages the  development  of  a  white  fungus  to 
which  the  tree  peony  is  susceptible. 

Planting 
Late  September  or  early  October  is  the  best 
time  for  planting  tree  peonies.  The  roots  should 
always  be  closely  examined  for  white  fungus. 
Any  rotted  parts  should  be  cut  off,  and  the  roots 
given  a  soaking  in  a  five  per  cent,  solution  of 
formalin.  Unless  the  fungus  is  thoroughly  re- 
moved it  will  spread  and  eventually  cause  the 
death  of  the  peony.  In  planting,  care  should  be 
taken  that  the  roots  do  not  cross  each  other,  and 
that  the  tree  is  set  at  the  same  depth  as  it  was 
in  the  nursery. 

Cultivation 
Tree  peonies,  unlike  herbaceous  peonies, 
should  never  be  cut  down.  With  the  exception 
of  an  occasional  shaping  of  the  tree  and  the  re- 
moval of  the  ends  of  the  branches  when  they  have 
died  back  a  little,  pruning  is  unnecessary. 

For  the  first  winter  after  planting  the  ground 
should  be  mulched  with  a  light  covering  so  that 
210 


REINE  ELIZABETH 
(P.  Moutan) 

One  of  the  finest  double  tree  peonies.    The  flowers  are  massive — salmon  pink  with  brilliant  copper 

tints 


THE  TREE  PEONY 

the  roots  will  not  heave  as  a  result  of  frost.  Each 
Autumn,  in  order  to  prevent  the  breaking  of  the 
branches  by  heavy  snows  and  to  help  protect  the 
trees  from  the  unscrupulous  appetites  of  hungry 
rabbits,  I  tie  up  my  tree  peonies  with  straw  in  a 
manner  similar  to  that  in  which  roses  are  gen- 
erally prepared  for  Winter.  After  the  first  warm 
days  of  Spring  have  brought  life  into  the  buds  of 
P.  moutan,  late  frosts  often  do  much  damage. 
For  this  reason  I  never  remove  the  straw  in  early 
Spring.  The  binding  strings  are  cut  and  the  straw 
is  loosely  woven  through  the  branches  or  drawn 
up  tent-wise  and  tied  to  a  tall  stake  so  as  to  keep 
off  the  cold  sweeping  winds  of  April  and  the 
sudden  still  frosts.  If  by  any  mischance  the 
buds  should  be  nipped,  they  should  be  shaded 
from  the  sun  at  once  and  allowed  to  thaw  grad- 
ually. Such  a  misfortune  has  never  occurred  in 
my  own  garden :  the  use  of  the  loose  straw  in  the 
branches  has  always  proved  effective.  Contrary 
to  expectation,  the  straw  covering  does  not  hasten 
the  Spring  growth  of  the  peonies,  and  so  does  no 
harm.  A  small  frame  covered  with  muslin  or 
canvas  has  been  suggested  as  another  simple  and 
practical  method  of  protection  from  late  frosts. 
211 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

The  tree  peony  will,  under  favorable  condi- 
tions, live  a  great  many  years.  There  are  records 
of  some  ninety  years  old.  When  once  established 
they  should  be  left  undisturbed  indefinitely. 

Fertilising 
The  tree  peony  may  be  fertilised  in  the  same 
manner  as  the  herbaceous.  In  moderation,  weak 
manure  water,  wood  ashes  and  bone  meal  may  all 
be  safely  used.  The  Japanese  successfully  employ 
a  special  mixture  composed  as  follows : 

Compost  iy2  -  1%  lbs. 
Superphosphate  of  lime  y^  oz. 
Straw  ash  2  -  3  oz. 
Oil  cake  l/2  lb. 
Saltpetre  ^  oz. 

This  formula  was  recently  given  to  me  by  a 
larger  grower  of  tree  peonies  in  Japan,  and  as 
the  culture  of  the  tree  peony  receives  especial  care 
in  that  country,  the  information  should  be  valu- 
able. Like  all  other  fertilisers,  the  mixture  must 
be  used  with  extreme  caution. 

Fertilisers  may  be  applied  to  the  best  advan- 
tage at  any  one  of  the  following  times :  one  month 
after  the  flowering  is  over,  in  the  Autumn  after 

212 


THE  TREE  PEONY 

the  leaves  fall,  in  the  Spring  before  the  buds  start 
forth,  or  just  before  the  flowers  open. 

It  would  be  of  interest  to  know  what  methods 
the  Chinese  gardeners  use  in  cultivating  the 
famous  tree  peonies  in  the  gardens  of  the  Man- 
darins, where  the  plants  frequently  attain  great 
size  and  produce  as  many  as  three  or  four  hun- 
dred flowers  every  year.  There  is  little  material 
available  on  the  subject  of  Chinese  gardens  and 
gardening,  and  the  Chinese  themselves  seem  in- 
disposed to  enlighten  us.  There  are  no  exporting 
nurseries  in  China  and  the  difficulties  of  obtain- 
ing either  peonies  or  facts  as  to  culture  are  almost 
insurmountable. 

Forcing 
Tree  peonies  lend  themselves  most  willingly 
to  the  process  of  forcing,  provided  it  is  gentle  and 
applied  to  good,  strong  plants.  They  should  be 
taken  first  into  a  house  that  is  slightly  heated, 
say  40°-50°  F.  In  about  two  weeks,  or  as  soon 
as  the  buds  begin  to  swell,  the  peonies  may  be 
removed  to  a  temperature  of  about  55°  F.,  where 
they  will  flower  in  five  or  six  weeks.  Frequent 
watering  is  necessary  and  if  the  atmosphere  is  dry 

213 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

the  plants  should  be  sprayed  in  addition  to  the 
watering.  As  soon  as  the  flowers  open,  water 
should  be  applied  to  the  roots  only.  The  flower- 
ing season  will  be  quite  long  if  the  tree  is  strong 
and  has  set  many  buds.  After  forcing,  tree  peo- 
nies require  two  or  three  years  for  recuperation. 
Because  the  blooms  of  double-flowered  varieties 
last  longer  upon  the  plant,  those  varieties  are 
best  for  forcing.  Reine  Elizabeth,  Lactea,  Jules 
Pirlot  and  Lord  Macartnay  are  excellent  for  this 
purpose. 

Propagation 
grafting 

The  usual  method  of  propagating  tree  peo- 
nies is  by  grafting.  In  China  and  in  France  they 
are  grafted  upon  the  fleshy  roots  of  herbaceous 
peonies.  In  Japan  the  practice  is  to  graft  upon 
the  wild  moutan  stock,  but  this  is  far  from  satis- 
factory. The  wild  moutan  stock  is  so  strong  and 
persistent  that  a  constant  struggle  is  necessary 
to  prevent  the  graft  from  being  choked  out.  The 
graft  sometimes  makes  roots  of  its  own  and  thus 
becomes  established,  but  it  is  at  the  price  of  eternal 
vigilance  on  the  gardener's  part.  At  the  present 
time  I  know  of  but  one  grower  who  imports  the 

214 


TREE  PEONIES 

Japanese  varieties  and  who  grafts  them  upon 
herbaceous  roots. 

The  method  of  grafting  known  in  China  since 
about  1000  a.d.,  and  followed  there  and  in  France, 
and  also  in  this  country  by  some  enthusiasts  who 
grow  tree  peonies,  is  the  best.  Seeds  of  herba- 
ceous peonies — P.  albiflora — are  sown  in  large 
quantities  to  furnish  roots.  A  good  piece  of  root, 
about  the  size  of  one's  middle  finger,  is  selected 
and  slit  from  the  crown  downwards  for  about  two 
inches.  The  scion  from  the  tree  peony  should  have 
at  least  two  eyes.  It  is  cut  in  the  shape  of  a  wedge 
and  after  being  fitted  with  exactness  into  the  slit, 
is  bound  in  the  usual  way.  The  grafted  root  is 
placed  in  a  deep  pot  of  soil,  with  one  eye  of  the 
moutan  scion  below  the  surface.  The  pot  is  then 
placed  in  a  frame. 

The  grafting  should  be  done  in  August  or 
September  so  that  the  stock  will  develop  roots 
before  the  Winter.  After  a  season's  growth  in 
the  cold  frame  the  peony  may  be  planted  out  and 
cultivated  the  same  as  an  established  plant.  In 
this  way  the  tree  peony  in  time  develops  its  own 
roots,  and  does  not  cause  annoyance  by  suckering. 

215 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

LAYERING 

A  number  of  other  methods  have  been  used 
for  propagating  tree  peonies.  Of  these,  layering 
is  perhaps  the  simplest.  Year-old  shoots  of  a 
strong,  healthy  plant  are  firmly  pegged  down  in 
the  Autumn.  The  first  year  after  pegging,  roots 
are  thrown  out  from  each  bud,  and  the  second 
year  the  new  little  plants  are  removed  from  the 
parent  tree. 

DIVISION 

Division  of  the  roots  to  increase  any  especially 
desirable  kinds  has  also  been  employed.  This  is 
done  during  the  Autumn,  at  the  usual  planting 
time.  In  dividing  the  roots  care  is  taken  that 
each  division  retains  some  fibrous  rootlets.  I  do 
not  know  to  just  what  extent  this  method  is  prac- 
tised. It  would  seem  to  have  the  serious  draw- 
back of  destroying  a  well-established  plant  and 
taking  great  risks  with  the  success  of  the  divisions. 
Grafting  upon  herbaceous  roots  has  proved  to  be 
the  most  practical  and  successful  method  of  in- 
creasing the  stock  of  existing  varieties. 


TREE  PEONIES 

SEEDS 

The  planting  of  the  seeds  of  tree  peonies,  as 
is  the  case  with  herbaceous  peonies,  brings  new 
varieties  into  existence.  There  is  a  constant  sur- 
prise and  delight  in  raising  tree  peonies  from 
seed:  beautiful  and  wonderful  flowers  reward  the 
patient  gardener.  Patience  is  indeed  necessary. 
The  seeds,  if  planted  as  soon  as  they  become  ripe, 
take  at  least  a  year  to  germinate — and  a  much 
longer  time  if  they  have  been  allowed  to  become 
dry  and  hard  before  being  planted.  After  the 
little  plants  appear,  from  five  to  seven  years  must 
pass  before  one  can  hope  for  flowers.  But  during 
the  long  wait  when  the  plants  are  still  too  young 
to  bloom  they  have  a  charm  of  their  own  in  the 
diversity  of  their  foliage.  I  know  of  two  gardens 
where  tree  peony  seeds  are  planted  regularly  each 
year,  so  that  there  are  new  ones  blooming  every 
season. 

Tree  peonies  raised  from  seeds  have  the  great 
advantage  of  being  on  their  own  roots  from  the 
start.  Then,  too,  the  seedlings,  although  differing 
from  the  parents  in  most  instances,  equal  them 
in  beauty.  This  is  a  point  worthy  of  considera- 
tion: for  the  same  difficulty  exists  in  purchasing 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

Japanese  tree  peonies  true  to  name  and  descrip- 
tion as  is  the  case  with  the  Japanese  herbaceous 
varieties. 

In  Chapter  VIII  directions  are  given  for  the 
planting  and  cultivation  of  herbaceous  peony 
seeds.  The  same  directions  may  be  followed  in 
the  care  of  the  seeds  and  little  plants  of  P.  moutan. 

Best  Varieties 
The  tree  peony  deserves  a  much  wider  ap- 
preciation and  cultivation  in  this  country  than 
it  now  receives.  While  its  requirements  are  more 
exacting  than  those  of  the  herbaceous  peony,  it 
is  far  from  being  as  fragile  and  difficult  to  grow 
as  is  often  supposed,  and  is  more  worth  while 
than  other  plants  on  which  it  is  necessary  to 
expend  greater  care. 

In  addition  to  the  European  varieties  of 
tree  peony  mentioned  in  Chapter  IV,  and  the 
varieties  especially  good  for  forcing  mentioned 
above,  I  append  a  list  of  twelve  beautiful  tree 
peonies  which  also  are  European — not  Japanese. 
Some  of  these  varieties  can  be  bought  in  this 
country.  All  can  be  obtained  from  French 
growers. 

218 


TREE  PEONIES 

Fragrans  maxima  plena,  flesh  pink  and 
salmon. 

Globosa,  very  full,  white  with  red  splashes. 

Glory  of  Shanghai,  anemone  type.  Glossy 
bright  pink. 

Jeanne  d'Arc,  very  large,  full  flower.  Sal- 
mon pink  with  yellow  tints. 

Lambertin^,  white,  shaded  with  pink  and 
purple. 

Louise  Mouchelet,  very  large,  double,  sal- 
mon flesh  pink. 

Madame  Laffay,  large  full  bloom,  violet, 
rose  and  white. 

Robert  Fortune,  brilliant  salmon  red, 
fringed  petals. 

Samarang,  semi-double,  bright  scarlet,  black 
spots. 

Souvenir  de  Ducher,  full  globular  flowers, 
deep  violet  with  reddish  tinge. 

Souvenir  de  Madame  Knorr,  large,  double, 
pale  flesh-pink  splashed  with  purple. 

Ville  de  Saint  Denis,  very  large  white 
flower,  tinted  purple. 


219 


3  2  a 


Hy2  3   « 


I  I'! 


-II 


a  0.5 

»S5 


I     JH 


If  a 


(3  >■  3i 


0  o, 


la   .•§ 


=S    -g  £oo*&3 


C-2 


ai      to 
•SJtoto 


s     o-e     -e 


3-g-SjaS 

8-SI& 

■s-s-suq 


a  &  fe  .««i  .' 
§3§5    ft.  5 

I    Q 

UQQ 


£■8.8.8  J^S1 

Ig^oggN 

o  n  ra  j"^  mOB  " 

E  ™  Shh'B  <d  o> 

«  o  o          I*  >  ► 

n  0  O       5tj  m  cj  a3 

§_«»!!:&:  Sh^ 
..    o       5      to 

Ototo         Uto     to 


sell 


220 


VARIOUS  SPECIES  OF 
THE  PEONY 


CHAPTER  XI 

VARIOUS  SPECIES  OF  THE  PEONY 

THE  peony  belongs  to  the  order  Ranuncula- 
cea3  (from  rana,  a  frog,  because  certain 
members  of  the  family  thrive  in  swampy  places) . 
The  order — sometimes  called  Crowfoot — em- 
braces twenty-seven  genera  of  plants,  including 
such  familiar  friends  as  Aconites,  Anemones, 
Buttercups,  Clematis,  Columbines,  Fennels,  Hel- 
lebores and  Larkspurs. 

There  are  between  eighteen  and  twenty-five 
species  of  the  Genus  Peeonia.  Few  botanists  agree 
as  to  the  exact  number  or  as  to  the  status  of  many 
of  the  varieties.  This  is  not  surprising,  for  in  the 
herbarium  different  species  are  often  almost  in- 
distinguishable and  in  the  garden  a  certain  num- 
ber vary  by  characters  of  most  unequal  value. 

A  key  to  the  species  of  the  Genus  Pseonia  was 
worked  out  by  Dr.  Coit  in  1907,  based  on  earlier 
descriptions.  While  this  key  is  not  final  it  is  a 
great  assistance  in  making  classifications.  In 
view  of  recent  information,  I  have  made  some 
changes  in  this  table  and  reprint  it  on  page  220. 

223 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

For  the  benefit  of  those  who  may  wish  to  start 
collecting  peonies  of  botanical  or  historical  in- 
terest, or  who  may  wish  to  use  some  of  the  wild 
species  in  hybridising,  I  give  a  few  notes  on  a 
number  of  species  and  some  of  their  varieties, 
which  notes  include  the  original  habitat  and  a 
short  description  of  the  flower.1 

1.  Albiflora  (  white  flowered) .   Central  China  and  Siberia. 
Older  Varieties: 

Candida, 

Festiva, 

Fragrans, 

the  first  named  albiflora  to  be  imported  into 
England  (1805), 

Humei, 

Pottsii, 

introduced  in  1821,  from  China,  by  John  Potts, 
a  collector  who  had  been  sent  there  by  the 
Royal  Horticultural  Society.  There  are  six 
peonies  named  Pottsii  or  a  variety  of  the 
same.  The  famous  Pottsii  in  John  Richardson's 
garden  was  a  rich  deep  crimson  and  double. 

1  For  complete  botanical  descriptions  of  the  prin- 
cipal varieties,  see  Bailey's  Standard  Cyclopedia  of 
Horticulture,  Vol.  Ill,  p.  2431   (1916). 


VARIOUS  SPECIES  OF  THE  PEONY 

Reevesii, 

Introduced     from     China    by    John     Reeves. 
Flowers  dark  red  with  slight  magenta  tint. 
Rubescens, 
Vestalis, 
Whitleyi, 

Introduced  in   1808. 
More  Recent  Varieties : 

See  Main  List  of  Peonies,  Chapter  III. 

2.  Anomala  (unusual — referring  to  the  leaves,  which  are 

finely  divided).  Siberia. 
Stated  by  some  writers  to  be  the  same  as  P.  Emodi, 
which  it  very  evidently  is  not.  First  mentioned 
in  Flora  Siberica  (St. Petersburg,  1747.)  Flowers 
with  irregular  petals  of  a  brilliant  red  and  with 
clusters  of  yellow  stamens.  The  roots  grow  to 
great  size  and  are  used  by  the  Mongol  Tartars 
for  food. 
Varieties : 

Insignis  (remarkable).     A  form  of  this  is  grown 

in   gardens   under   the  name   of   Peter   Barr. 

Flowers  magenta. 
Intermedia  (intermediate).  Flowers  rosy  crimson. 

3.  Arietina  (ram's  horn  fruited).    Levant  and  Crete. 

It  is  a  very  early  bloomer.  Index  Kewensis  re- 
gards this  as  a  form  of  peregrina.  Flowers  dark 
red;  each  leaf  is  divided  into  segments,  each  from 
one  to  two  inches  wide. 

4.  Brownii  (Brown's).    California  and  Northwest. 

This  is  the  only  species  native  to  the  Western 
15  225 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

Hemisphere.  It  blooms  in  June  and  July,  often 
near  banks  of  melting  snow.  The  flowers  are 
dull  red  or  brown  and  are  not  attractive. 

5.  Cambessedesii     (Cambessedes's).      Balearic    Islands 

and  Corsica. 

Flowers  deep  rose  pink  with  slight  magenta  tint. 

Introduced   into   England   in   1896   by   Miss   F. 

Geoghegan. 

6.  Corallina  (coral-red,  referring  to  the  seeds).    South- 

ern Europe  to  Asia  Minor. 

It  is  claimed  that  Corallina  has  grown  wild  on 
an  island  in  the  Severn.  If  this  is  true,  it  is  the 
only  peony  native  to  England.  Flowers,  bright 
crimson.  The  segments  of  the  leaves  are  quite 
distinct  from  one  another  at  the  base  and  nine 
in  number  in  the  fully  developed  lowest  leaves. 
Varieties : 

Broteri  (Brotero's).  Spain  and  Portugal.  Dwarf 
habit,  flowers  crimson,  stems  and  leaf-stalks  red. 
Fragrant.    This  variety  is  probably  the  P.  Lusi- 
tanica  of  Philip  Miller. 
Russi     (Russ's).       Corsica,    Sardinia,    Algeria. 

Flowers  rose  coloured. 
Triternata  (three  times  ternate,  i.e.,  with  twenty- 
seven  leaflets),  rose  and  whitish  flowers. 

7.  Coriacea  (leathery).     Spain,  North  Africa. 

Flowers  bright  crimson,  seeds  dark  purple. 
Leaves  composed  of  nine  to  thirteen  leaflets,  which 
become  leathery  as  they  advance  in  age. 

8.  Decora  (comely). 

The  first  mention  of  this  peony  is  that  seeds  came 


VARIOUS  SPECIES  OF  THE  PEONY 

from  Constantinople.    Flowers  rather  small,  dark 
red,  tinted  magenta.     Dwarf  habit,  very  bushy. 
Varieties : 

Alba  (white),  satiny  white,  tinted  pink. 
Elatior  (taller),  large  magenta  coloured  flowers. 
Pallasii  (Pallass's — originally  Byzantina),  deep 
crimson  flowers. 

9.  Delavayi  (Delavay's).     China. 

Woody  stems,  small  flowers,  red,  tinted  magenta. 
Variety : 

Angustiloba      (narrow-leaved),     finely     divided 
leaves. 

10.  Emodi    (Mount    Emodus — not    found    in    modern 

gazetteers). 

This  is  the  only  peony  native  to  India.  It  grows 
in  the  temperate  zone  in  the  Himalayan  Moun- 
tains from  Kumaon  to  Kashmir.  Flowers  single, 
four  to  six  inches  across,  pure  white  with  promi- 
nent yellow  stamens.  One  of  the  most  beautiful 
of  the  single  flowers.  The  plant  has  a  slender 
growth  and  a  distinctive  habit.  Although  more 
tender  than  any  other  herbaceous  variety,  it  is 
one  of  the  wild  varieties  worth  growing  in  the 
garden.  Index  Kewensis  considers  this  a  form 
of  P.  anomala.  Other  authorities  state  that  it  is 
closely  allied  to  P.  albiflora,  with  which  (and 
Veitchii)  it  shares  the  unusual  characteristic  of 
bearing  more  than  one  flower  on  a  stem.  Of  the 
one  to  five  flowers  which  grow  on  a  stem  rarely 
more  than  two  are  in  bloom  at  the  same  time. 
227 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

11.  Lutca  (yellow) — see  p.  103. 
Variety : 

Superba,  large  flowers. 

12.  Mlokosewitschii.       Eastern    part    of    the    central 

Caucasus. 
Discovered  by  Mlokosewitsch  and  only  recently 
introduced.      Single   flowers   of   sulphur  yellow. 
Leaves  have  red  veins  and  margins.     Probably 
closely  related  to  Wittmaniana. 

13.  Moutan — see  Suffruticosa  below. 

14.  Obovata   (obovate — referring  to  the  petals).     Si- 

beria, Manchuria,  China. 
Introduced  into  England  in  1900  by  E.  H.  Wilson, 
who  sent  seeds  collected  in  the  Province  of  Hupek, 
central  China.     Flowers  purplish  red;  seeds  like 
berries,  dark  blue. 

15.  Officinalis  (of  the  apothecary  shops) — see  p.  99. 
Varieties : 

Albicans,  old  double  white,  which  opens  a  pale 

flesh  and  gradually  changes  to  a  pure  white. 
Anemoneflora,    single   and   double   crimson   with 

magenta  tint. 
Blanda  (alluring),  pale  purple — unlike  its  name, 

not  desirable. 
Carnescens,  deep  rose  coloured,  which  grows  paler 

after  opening.      Sometimes   called  variegated 

peony. 
Lobata,  a  dwarf  form. 

Rubra,  brilliant  red — the  common  red  peony. 
Rosea,  rose  coloured. 
Sabini,  single  red,  yellow  stamens  and  anthers. 


VARIOUS  SPECIES  OF  THE  PEONY 

16.  Paradoxa  (paradoxical).    Levant. 

First  cultivated  in  Holland.     One  of  the  smallest 
peonies.     Bright  carmine  pink  flowers  on  very 
short  stems.     Lower  leaves  finely  divided. 
Variety : 

Fimbriata  (fringed),  semi-double  flowers  of  bright 
crimson,  inner  ones  narrow  like  a  fringe 

17.  Peregrina  (foreign).     Southern  Europe. 

Flowers  are  deep  red.  Lower  leaves  finely  divided. 
Varieties : 

Humilis  (dwarf),  mountains  of  Spain.     Bright 

red  flowers,  turning  to  magenta. 
Microcarpa   (small  fruited),  even  smaller  than 

Humilis,  to  which  it  is  closely  allied. 

18.  Suffruticosa  (woody)  or  Tree  Peony.   See  p.  101. 

» 

19.  Tenuifoha  (slender  leaved).    See  p.  96. 

Varieties : 

Rubra  plena  (double  red). 
Latifolia  (broad  leaved). 

20.  Veitchii  (Veitch's).    Western  China. 

Recently  introduced  by  E.  H.  Wilson.    Flowers 
purplish  crimson ;  several  blooms  on  one  stem. 

21.  Wittmaniana  (Wittman's).     Caucasus.     See  p.  98. 


APPENDIX 


APPENDIX  A 

References  to  Articles  on  the  Peony  and  to 
Books  on  Subjects  Connected  with  the 
Peony 

THE  names  of  a  few  articles  on  the  peony 
and  a  few  books  on  collateral  subjects  are 
given  below.  This  list  is  not  intended  to  be  com- 
plete, but  is  merely  a  starting  point  for  anyone 
who  wishes  to  pursue  further  the  study  of  the 
peony  in  all  its  branches. 

THE  PEONY 

Monograph  of  the  Genus  Paeonia, 
George  Anderson, 

Transactions  Linnasan  Society,  1817. 
Monograph  of  the  Genus  Paeonia, 
J.  G.  Baker, 

Gardener's  Chronicle  (1884),  Vol.  21  N.  S.,  pp. 
732,  779,  780,  828,  Vol.  22  N.  S.,  pp.  9,  10. 
Monograph  of  Herbaceous  Peonies, 
H.  Correvon, 

The  Garden  (1894),  Vol.  46,  p.  104. 
Index  Kewensis  and  References  Therein. 
Four  Bulletins  Published  by  Cornell  University 
(Agricultural  Experiment  Station)  ; 
233 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

The  Peony  Check-List, 
J.  Eliot  Coit,  1907. 

No.  259  The  Peony, 
J.  Eliot  Coit,  1908. 

No.  278  Classification  of  the  Peony, 
Leon  D.  Batchelor,  1910. 

No.  306  Classification  of  the  Peony, 
Leon  D.  Batchelor,  1911. 
Paeonia — Article  by  K.  C.  Davis  in  Cyclopedia  of  Ameri- 
can  Horticulture,   Vol.   3,   p.    243.     Macmillan 
Company,  1916. 

THE    SOIL 

Vegetable  Mould  and  Earth  Worms, 
Charles  Darwin, 

D.  Appleton  &  Co.,  1900. 
First  Principles  of  Soil  Fertility, 
Alfred  Vivian, 

Orange  Judd  Co.,  1913. 
Soil  Management, 
F.  H.  King, 

Orange   Judd   Co.,   1914. 

PLANT  BREEDING 

The  Effects  of  Cross  and  Self  Fertilisation  in  the  Vege- 
table Kingdom, 
Charles  Darwin,  1876. 
Plant  Breeding, 
Hugo  de  Vries, 

Open  Court  Publishing  Co.,  Chicago,  1907. 
Breeding  and  The  Mendelian  Discovery, 
A.  D.  Darbishire, 

Cassell  &  Co.,  1913. 

234 


APPENDIX  A 

Fundamentals  of  Plant  Breeding, 
John  M.  Coulter, 

D.  Appleton  &  Co.,  1914. 
Plant  Breeding, 

L.  H.  Bailey  and  A.  W.  Gilbert, 
Macmillan  Company,  1915. 

THE   PEONY  IN   CHINA  AND  JAPAN 

Chinese  Porcelain, 
W.  G.  Gulland, 

Chapman  &  Hall,  1902. 
Oriental  Ceramic  Art, 
Stephen  W.  Bushell, 

D.  Appleton  &  Co.,   1899. 
Chinese  Art, 

Stephen  W.  Bushell, 

Victoria  and  Albert  Museum,  1909. 
Chinese  Art  Motive  Interpretation, 
W.  R.  Tredwell, 

Putnam  &  Sons,  1915. 
Chinese  Pottery  and  Porcelain, 
Robert  L.  Hobson, 

Funk  &  Wagnalls,  1915. 
Landscape  Gardening  in  Japan, 
Josiah  Condon, 

Kelly  &  Walsh,  Ltd.,  1893. 
The  Flowers  and  Gardens  of  Japan, 
Ella   du   Cain, 

A.  and  C.  Black. 
Ancient  Tales  and  Folklore  of  Japan, 
R.  G.  Smith, 

A.  and  C.  Black,  1908. 

235 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

MISCELLANEOUS 

Bacteria  in  Relation  to  Country  Life, 
J.  G.  Lipman, 

Macmillan  Company,  1909. 
Plant  Autographs  and  Their  Revelations, 
Jagadis  Chunder  Bose, 

Smithsonian  Institution  Publications  No.  2339, 
1915. 

Contains  a  most  interesting  acccount  of  re- 
cent investigations  in  plant  growth. 


Whetzel  -Diseases  of  the  Penny  (Mass.  Hort.  Soc,  1915) 

PLATE    1 
Fig.   1.     Peony  root  long  affected  with  root  gall.     The  main  roots  are  short  and  stubby.    The  small 
feeding  roots  are  covered  with  young  galls.      Fig.  2.  Leaf  showing  mosaic  disease  mottlings.     Fig.  3. 
Leaves  and  stems  badly  affected  with  the  anthracnose.     Fig.  4.     The  leaf  blotch  lesions  as  they  appear 
on  both  upper  and  lower  surface  of  the  leaf,  purple  above,  dull  brown  below. 


Whetzel— Diseases  of  the  Peony  <  Mass.  Hort.  isoc.  i9I5) 

PLATE  2 

Fig.  1.     Shoots  wilting  over  from  attack  of  Botrytis  at  the  base.    Fig.  2.   Two  Botrytis rotted  buds 

and  one  healthy  one  from  the  same  plant.  Fig.  3.  Young  bud  blighted,  the  pathogen  extending  into  and 

attacking  the  stem.    Fig.  4.    Botrytis  blighted  leaves.    Note  the  powdery  spore  masses  on  the  leaf 

showing  the  lower  surface.    Fig.  5.    An  old  diseased  stalk  covered  with  minute  sclerotia  of  the  Botrytis. 


APPENDIX  B 

DISEASES  OF  THE  PEONY* 
By  Prof.  H.  H.  Whetzel,  Ithaca,  N.  Y.,  The 
John  Lewis  Russell  Lecture  Delivered 
Before    the    Massachusetts    Horticul- 
tural Society,  March  27,  1915. 

IT  is  an  old  fable  passed  down  from  catalog 
to  catalog  that  "  The  peony  is  free  from  dis- 
eases." Yet  one  has  only  to  observe  carefully  for 
one  season  the  peony  plants  in  gardens,  lawns, 
and  nurseries  to  lose  his  childish  faith  in  the  story. 
Not  less  than  seven  distinct  diseases  of  this  beau- 
tiful perennial  are  now  commonly  to  be  met  with 
in  eastern  United  States.  Doubtless  there  are 
others  not  yet  recognized  or  reported.  I  now  have 
these  seven  slated  for  further  study  and  observa- 
tion and  expect  to  add  others  to  my  list  this  sea- 
son. The  less  we  know  of  the  diseases  of  a  plant 
the  fewer  and  less  important  they  appear.  The 
reverse  is  equally  true.     Yet  is  is  only  through 

*Reprinted  from  the  Transactions  of  the  Mas- 
sachusetts Horticultural  Society,  1915,  Part  1. 

237 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 
greater  familiarity  and  more  knowledge  of  them 
that  we  may  hope  to  save  our  plants  from  their 
ravages. 

The  first  step  in  our  study  of  the  diseases  of 
the  peony  is  to  learn  to  recognise  them,  to  distin- 
guish them,  the  one  from  the  others,  to  name  them. 
This  we  may  accomplish  only  by  learningthe  char- 
acteristic symptoms  of  each.  This  will  be  my  chief 
object  in  the  present  paper.  The  next  step  is  to 
discover  the  cause  of  each  different  malady,  to  un- 
cover the  nature  of  the  pathogen,  be  it  fungus,  bac- 
terium, or  what-not,  that  is  chiefly  responsible 
for  the  diseased  condition.  In  this  direction  but 
little  progress  has  as  yet  been  made.  This  is 
largely  the  problem  of  the  plant  doctors,  and 
I  hope  to  be  able  to  have  shortly  many  more  facts 
on  this  phase  of  the  subject  than  we  now  possess. 

Of  the  control  of  these  different  diseases  least 
is  naturally  known,  and  only  with  fuller  knowl- 
edge of  the  pathogens  and  their  life  habits  will 
we  be  able  to  intelligently  undertake  experiments 
on  control.  What  I  may  have  to  offer  on  this 
part  of  the  subject  must  of  necessity  be  only 
suggestions. 


APPENDIX  B 

Diseases  of  the  Root 
The  Root  Gall. 

The  root  gall  disease  appears  to  be  rather 
widely  distributed  in  eastern  United  States  and 
is  well  known  to  the  growers  who  make  a  specialty 
of  this  plant.  Specimens  have  come  to  my  hands 
from  time  to  time  during  the  last  eight  years.  No 
special  investigations  on  this  disease  appear  to 
have  been  made,  and  aside  from  a  short  article  in 
the  Florists'  Exchange  of  April  19,  1909,  it  ap- 
pears to  have  been  rarely  written  about.  Whether 
it  was  first  imported  from  Europe  or  is  of  Ameri- 
can origin  is  not  known.  Certain  imported 
French  varieties  are  often  very  severely  affected. 
It  is  regarded  by  peony  specialists  as  a  trouble- 
some and  by  some  as  a  dangerous  malady. 

Symptoms.  —  The  above-ground  symptoms 
are  many  weak,  spindling  shoots  which  remain 
short  and  give  no  blooms.  The  shoots  often 
grow  fewer  and  shorter  from  season  to  season, 
the  plants  gradually  dying  out.  In  other  cases 
the  plants  appear  to  gradually  recover,  the  shoots 
growing  stronger  from  year  to  year  and  finally 
blooming.     The  latter  appears  to  be  the  case 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 
when  the  roots  are  frequently  divided  and  reset. 
The  affected  roots  are  short,  stubby,  and  irregu- 
larly knotted  or  swollen.  The  crown  on  which 
the  bud  sets  is  often  much  swollen.  The  fine 
rootlets  are  often  covered  with  galls.  The  lower 
ends  of  the  galled  roots  seem  to  rot  away. 

Cause. — The  nematode  worm,  Heterodera 
radicicola,  is  probably  responsible  for  some  galls 
on  peony  roots.  Bessey  1  reports  it  as  very  injuri- 
ous to  the  roots  of  the  peony.  This  microscopic 
worm  affects  the  roots  of  no  less  than  480  differ- 
ent species  of  plants.  It  is  most  common  and 
destructive  in  the  South,  but  is  frequent  on  green- 
house plants  in  northern  United  States  and  on 
the  roots  of  certain  perennials,  like  ginseng  and 
peony,  easily  survives  the  Winter  outside. 

Control. — Until  a  fuller  investigation  of  the 
disease  has  been  made,  suggestions  as  to  control 
cannot  be  very  definite.  In  general  it  will  prob- 
ably be  most  profitable  to  dig  up  and  destroy  all 
diseased  plants.  The  experience  of  some  growers 
indicates  that  with  rare  or  expensive  varieties  it 
may  be  profitable  to  help  the  plant  "  outgrow  " 


1  Bessey,  E.  A.     Root  Knot  and  its  Control.     U.  S. 
Agr.  Dept.  Bur.  PI.  Ind.  Bui.  217: 18,  43. 
240 


APPENDIX  B 
the  trouble  by  frequently  dividing  and  trans- 
planting the  roots.  Where  nematodes  are  the 
cause  of  the  swellings,  diseased  roots  should  never 
be  planted  on  land  along  with  the  healthy  or  on 
which  it  is  expected  to  grow  peonies  continuously. 
Land  on  which  galled  plants  have  been  grown 
should  not  be  used  again  for  peonies  for  three 
or  four  years.  The  worms  will  usually  die  out, 
especially  here  in  the  North,  for  want  of  a  suit- 
able host  in  which  to  survive. 
Root  Rots. 

Rotting  roots  of  normal  size  and  shape  have 
several  times  been  sent  to  me  by  growers.  What 
appears  to  have  been  a  similar  root  rot  has  been 
reported  by  the  botanists  of  the  Connecticut  and 
Massachusetts  Experiment  Stations.  Some 
growers  have  reported  it  as  very  destructive. 

Symptoms. — The  rotting  away  of  the  crown 
and  the  larger  roots  seems  to  be  a  rather  constant 
symptom.  The  top  of  the  plants  either  fails  to 
appear  in  the  Spring  or  wilts  and  dies  during  the 
Summer. 

Cause. — The  cause  of  root  rot  is  apparently 
unknown.  Nothing  more  than  a  casual  examina- 
tion appears  to  have  been  made  by  those  plant 

16  241 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 
pathologists  who  have  reported  on  the  disease. 
It  is  very  probable  that  we  have  under  the  name 
of  root  rot  several  different  diseases.  They  are 
very  likely  due  to  fungi  or  bacteria,  though 
Winter  injury  may  sometimes  be  responsible. 

Control. — Removal  and  destruction  of  dis- 
eased roots  and  the  planting  of  peonies  on  other 
land  are  the  only  suggestions  to  be  made  with  our 
present  knowledge  of  root  rots. 

Diseases  of  the  Stem,  Leaves,  and  Flowers 
The  Mosaic  Disease. 

So  far  as  I  am  aware  this  is  the  first  record  of 
this  very  peculiar  and  interesting  malady  of  the 
peony  leaf.  I  have  observed  this  disease  now  for 
several  seasons  in  the  peony  plantation  at  Cornell 
University.  It  has  doubtless  been  observed  by 
others,  and  is  probably  of  wide  distribution.  It 
does  not  appear  to  be  a  serious  malady. 

Symptoms. — The  symptoms  are  very  strik- 
ing. Usually  only  one  or  two  stalks  in  a  cluster 
are  affected.  The  leaves  show  rings  of  concen- 
tric bands  of  alternating  dark  and  light  green 
color.  The  spots  are  sometimes  large,  with  broad 
bands;  in  other  cases  small  with  narrow  bands, 
the  spots  densely  crowded  over  the  leaf.    I  have 


APPENDIX  B 

observed  no  evidences  of  dwarfing  or  injury  other 
than  the  peculiar  markings  above  described. 

Cause. — So  far  as  I  am  aware  no  investigation 
of  the  cause  of  this  disease  has  been  undertaken. 
It  looks  much  like  the  well-known  mosaic  disease 
of  tobacco  and  other  plants,  the  cause  of  which 
has  long  been  sought  but  never  certainly  dis- 
covered. The  mosaic  disease  of  tobacco  is  known 
to  be  very  infectious.  Whether  this  of  the  peony 
is  also  capable  of  being  transmitted  from  dis- 
eased to  healthy  plants,  I  have  not  determined 
as  yet. 

Control. — Nothing  with  respect  to  control  can 
be    suggested    except    destruction    of    diseased 
plants,  until  we  know  more  of  the  nature  and 
cause  of  the  trouble. 
The  Anthracnose. 

This  is  a  name  I  am  giving  to  a  disease  affect- 
ing the  stems  and  leaves  of  the  peony.  So  far  as 
I  can  find  this  has  never  been  recorded  before, 
at  least  in  this  country.  It  appears,  from  my 
observations  in  the  Cornell  University  peony 
plantation,  to  be  a  rather  dangerous  malady  and 
deserving  of  the  attention  of  peony  growers  and 
plant  pathologists. 

243 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

Symptoms. — The  disease  shows  first  in  the 
early  summer  as  dark  reddisn  bordered  spots  with 
almost  white  centres.  Later  the  centres  become 
a  bit  sunken  and  show  minute  black  pimples 
■under  the  dead  epidermis,  presumably  the  begin- 
nings of  the  fungous  fruit  bodies.  During  the 
latter  part  of  the  summer  the  spotting  of  the 
stems  becomes  very  severe  and  the  leaves  are  often 
severely  affected  with  what  appears  to  be  the 
same  disease. 

Cause. — This  anthracnose  is  quite  certainly  a 
fungous  disease,  but  up  to  the  present  I  have  not 
been  able  to  discover  mature  fruit  bodies  of  a 
fungus  in  the  lesions  and  have  not  had  the  time  to 
undertake  a  careful  investigation  of  the  malady. 

Control. — Probably  sanitary  measures,  in- 
volving removal  and  burning  of  diseased  tops 
early  in  the  Autumn,  would  be  effective  in  getting 
rid  of  the  pathogen  which  probably  winters  in 
the  diseased  stems  and  leaves. 
The  Leaf  Blotch. 

This  disease  appears  to  be  one  of  the  best 
and  longest  known  diseases  of  peonies.  It  was 
first  described  from  Europe,  where  it  is  to  be  ob- 
served in  almost  every  peony  planting  to-day. 

244 


APPENDIX  B 

It  is  also  very  common  in  America.  It  does  not 
appear  to  be  a  serious  disease,  as  it  affects  only 
the  leaves  and  does  not  appear  until  the  latter 
part  of  the  season  after  the  leaves  have  apparently 
begun  to  mature  for  Autumn. 

Symptoms. — The  symptoms  are  distinct  and 
striking,  large  purple  blotches  on  the  upper  sur- 
face, often  an  inch  or  two  or  three  inches  in  diame- 
ter. The  tissue  does  not  become  dead  and  dry 
as  in  the  case  of  the  Botrytis  blight  spots  to  be 
described  later.  The  blotch  on  the  underside  of 
the  leaf  is  a  peculiar  dull  brown,  as  though  the 
epidermis  of  the  leaf  had  been  scorched.  In  moist 
weather  the  centre  of  the  spot  below  becomes  cov- 
ered with  an  olive  green  felt,  the  stalks  and  spores 
of  the  pathogen. 

Cause. — The  disease  is  doubtless  due  to  a  fun- 
gus which  goes  by  the  name  of  Cladosporium 
pceonice. 

Control. — Where  this  disease  gives  trouble, 
early  removal  and  destruction  of  all  diseased  tops 
will  doubtless  be  found  most  satisfactory  in  pre- 
venting its  appearance  another  season.  The  fun- 
gus most  probably  passes  the  Winter  in  the  dis- 
eased and  fallen  leaves,  from  which  in  the  Spring 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

a  new  crop  of  spores  find  their  way  to  the  next 

crop  of  leaves. 

The  Sclerotinia  Stem  Rot. 

This  disease  is  probably  more  common  than  is 
suspected,  but  because  its  symptoms  are  so  like 
those  of  the  Botrytis  disease  has  probably  seldom 
been  recognised.  I  have  had  diseased  specimens 
from  but  one  grower  some  years  ago,  but  recent 
inoculation  experiments  which  I  have  made  with 
the  pathogens  show  it  capable  of  rapid  destruction 
of  young  peony  shoots. 

Symptoms. — A  sudden  wilting  of  young  or 
even  nearly  mature  stalks,  due  to  a  rotting  off  at 
the  base  near  the  ground,  is  the  first  evidence  of 
this  disease.  At  this  stage  it  cannot  usually  be 
distinguished  from  the  more  common  Botrytis 
disease  which  affects  the  plants  in  the  same  way. 
Later  the  dead  stalks  on  being  split  open  will 
often  show  large  black  bodies,  sclerotia,  in  the 
pith.  These  are  never  present  in  stalks  killed 
by  Botrytis. 

Cause. — The  disease  is  caused  by  a  fungus, 
Sclerotinia  libertiana,  which  is  a  most  omnipres- 
ent parasite  amongst  cultivated  plants,  especially 
greenhouse  and  garden  plants.    It  is  not  particu- 

246 


APPENDIX  B 

lar  as  to  the  host  plants  it  attacks,  so  it  is  not  sur- 
prising that  the  peony,  too,  sometimes  falls  a 
victim  to  it.  Wet  weather  greatly  favors  its 
destructiveness. 

Control. — Prompt  removal  and  destruction  of 
wilting  stalks,  cutting  close  to  the  crown  and  the 
removal  of  the  soil  all  about  the  crown  is  impor- 
tant. The  fungous  threads  spread  from  stalk  to 
stalk  through  the  soil.  Removed  soil  should  be 
replaced  with  fresh,  clean  soil,  preferably  sand. 
Keep  manure  away  from  the  crowns.  The  sclero- 
tia  carry  the  fungus  through  the  Winter  and 
therefore  the  burning  of  all  diseased  stalks  is 
desirable. 
The  Botrytis  Blight. 

This  is  by  far  the  most  common  and  destruc- 
tive disease  of  the  peony  so  far  as  known  at  pres- 
ent. This  disease  is  frequently  epidemic,  espe- 
cially during  wet  Springs.  It  occurs  wherever 
peonies  are  grown,  apparently  the  world  over. 
It  is  well  known  in  Europe,  especially  in  Holland 
and  England.  Much  in  the  way  of  scattered 
notes  and  records  of  its  occurrence  has  appeared 
in  florists'  papers  and  experiment  station  reports 
for  the  past  twenty  years.     I  published  a  short 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

article  on  the  symptoms  and  destructiveness  of 
this  disease  in  the  Florists'  Exchange,  September 
14,  1912. 

Symptoms. — The  disease  affects  stems,  buds, 
and  leaves,  appearing  on  these  organs  in  the 
Spring  and  Summer  in  the  order  given.  The  first 
appearance  of  the  malady  is  almost  always  early 
in  the  Spring  as  the  stalks  are  coming  up.  Shoots 
4  to  8  inches  tall,  their  leaves  not  yet  expanded, 
will  suddenly  wilt  and  fall  over.  Examination 
shows  them  to  be  rotted  at  the  base  at  or  below  the 
surface  of  the  soil.  The  lesions  begin  usually  at 
the  base  of  the  first  leaf  sheath  and  spread  down 
to  the  crown  and  up  often  an  inch  or  more  above 
ground.  The  rotted  portion  soon  becomes  cov- 
ered with  a  felty  brown  coat  of  spores  and  spore 
stalks  of  the  fungus,  thus  distinguishing  it  from 
the  similar  stem  rot  caused  by  Sclerotinia.  While 
it  is  generally  the  young  stems  that  are  affected, 
I  have  seen  stalks  with  blossoms  opening,  sud- 
denly wilt  and  fall  over  from  Botrytis  stem  rot 
at  the  base. 

The  buds  are  the  next  to  show  injury  from 
this  disease.  Sometimes  the  very  small  young 
buds  are  attacked,  turn  black  and  dry  up.  This 
is  often  spoken  of  as  bud  blast.    Larger  buds  are 


APPENDIX  B 

later  affected,  turn  brown  and  fail  to  open;  the 
stalk  for  several  inches  below  the  bud  is  usually 
killed,  turns  brown  and  frequently  shows  alter- 
nating stripes  or  bands  of  dark  and  light  brown 
color.  When  broken  open,  such  buds  present  a 
dark  brown  rotten  mass.  This  is  the  "  bud  rot  " 
stage  of  the  disease.  In  a  wet  season  as  high  as 
80  or  90  per  cent,  of  the  buds  may  thus  be  rotted 
before  they  can  open.  Opened  flowers  are  also  often 
affected,  becoming  discolored  and  rotten.  The 
rotted  buds  and  flowers  soon  become  covered  with 
the  brown  felt  of  the  spore  stalks  and  spores  of 
the  pathogen. 

The  leaves  are  usually  the  last  to  show  symp- 
toms of  this  disease,  in  the  form  of  large  irregular 
spots  which  spread  rapidly  usually  from  the  apex 
or  sinuses  of  the  leaves.  The  tissue  is  killed,  be- 
coming brown  and  dry,  so  that  it  crumples  readily. 
The  underside  of  the  spot  is  soon  covered  with 
the  spore  stalks  of  the  fungus.  The  blighting  of 
the  leaves  gives  the  plants  a  most  untidy  appear- 
ance. The  leaf  blight  form  is  very  common  on 
peony  plants  everywhere  during  the  latter  part 
of  the  Summer,  becoming  very  bad  during  rainy 
weather.  In  dry  seasons  the  disease  is  but  little 
in  evidence. 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

Cause. — The  cause  of  this  disease  has  long 
been  attributed  to  the  fungus,  Botrytis,  found 
constantly  associated  with  the  lesions  on  stem, 
bud,  and  leaf.  There  are  many  described  species 
of  Botrytis,  some  of  which  are  very  common  on 
greenhouse  and  garden  crops.  The  Botrytis 
forms  found  on  peony  have  been  referred  usually 
to  Botrytis  vulgaris  or  Botrytis  cinerea,  and  Bo- 
trytis p&oniaz,  the  last  described  by  a  Hollander 
as  the  cause  of  the  disease  in  that  country.  My 
own  studies  indicate  that  there  are  a  least  two 
distinct  species  of  Botrytis  atacking  and  causing 
identical  symptoms  in  the  peonies  both  in  this 
country  and  in  Europe.  The  species  while  quite 
distinct  in  structure  are  very  similar  in  their  life 
habits  and  effects  on  the  peony.  One  forms  large 
sclerotia  (resting  bodies),  while  the  other  forms 
very  minute  ones.  I  have  never  seen  the  sclerotia 
of  the  large  form  except  in  my  cultures,  but  the 
small  ones  are  commonly  formed  in  the  diseased 
stalks  just  beneath  the  epidermis  and  appear  as 
black  pimples  the  size  of  a  pin-head.  Presumably 
they  serve  to  carry  the  fungus  through  the  Winter 
on  the  old  stubble  left  by  cutting  away  the  tops. 
There  in  the  Spring  they  probably  give  rise  to  a 


APPENDIX  B 
new  crop  of  spores,  in  just  the  best  position  to 
infect  the  new  shoots  when  they  come  up.    I  have 
not  yet  determined  whether  these  pathogens  ever 
attack  crowns  and  roots  or  not. 

Control. — The  control  of  this  disease  is  very 
difficult  for  several  reasons.  It  is  destructive  only 
in  wet  seasons.  One  of  the  pathogens,  the  small 
sclerotial  form,  is  very  common  and  widely  dis- 
tributed. The  other,  the  large  sclerotial  form, 
having  a  number  of  different  hosts,  may  readily 
pass  from  one  of  them  to  the  peony  if  it  be  near 
by.  Spores  are  produced  in  great  quantities  and 
carried  both  by  wind  and  insects.  Ants  seem  to 
carry  the  spores  from  the  base  of  diseased  stalks 
to  the  buds  of  healthy  plants.  Here  in  the  exuded 
sugary  solution,  so  abundant  upon  unopened 
peony  buds,  the  spores  find  both  food  and  moist- 
ure and  germinate  much  more  promptly  and 
vigorously  than  in  water.  The  peony  is  very  sus- 
ceptible, there  being  apparently  little  difference 
in  susceptibility  of  the  different  varieties.  Spray- 
ing is  in  the  first  place  undesirable,  as  it  discolors 
foliage  and  buds,  and  in  the  second  place  our  ex- 
periments indicate  that  the  sugary  exudate  of  the 
buds  effectively  neutralizes  the  copper  in  Bor- 

251 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

deaux  so  that  the  spores  germinate  and  infect 
sprayed  buds  just  as  readily  as  unsprayed.  Sul- 
phur in  its  various  forms  appears  to  be  equally 
ineffective  in  preventing  the  bud  rot  form  of  the 
malady. 

Eradication  measures  offer  the  most  promise 
of  success  in  the  control  of  the  Botrytis  blight. 
To  be  effective,  however,  they  must  begin  with  the 
careful  removal  of  the  old  stubs  in  the  Autumn 
or  very  early  in  the  Spring  and  be  prosecuted  per- 
sistently throughout  the  season.  To  remove  the 
old  stubble  carefully,  remove  the  soil  from  the 
crown,  so  as  not  to  injure  the  buds.  Cut  away 
the  old  stalks  close  to  the  crown  and  burn.  These 
old  stalks  harbor  the  fungus.  Replace  the  soil 
removed  with  fresh,  clean  soil,  preferably  sand, 
or  at  least  top  coat  with  sand.  When  the  shoots 
begin  to  appear,  inspect  them  daily  and  remove 
by  cutting  close  to  the  crown  any  that  show  wilt- 
ing. These  should  be  burned.  By  promptly  re- 
moving these  wilting  shoots,  you  prevent  the  crop 
of  spores  that  always  appears  if  the  dead  shoots 
are  left  and  so  greatly  reduce  the  chance  of  infec- 
tion of  buds  and  leaves. 

The  daily  inspection  must  now  include  the 

252 


APPENDIX  B 

young  growing  buds  and  any  that  begin  to  turn 
brown  or  black  and  die  must  be  removed  and 
destroyed.  As  the  buds  grow  older  and  approach 
the  blooming  time,  the  infection  will  usually  be 
first  evident  at  the  base  of  the  bud  on  one  side  as 
a  brown  lesion,  which  will  gradually  spread  up, 
involving  the  entire  bud,  turning  it  brown. 
Spreading  downward  it  gradually  involves  the 
entire  circumference  of  the  stem.  It  will  be  very 
important  to  detect  these  lesions  in  the  early 
stages  and  remove  the  diseased  buds,  for  spores 
are  produced  most  abundantly  on  rotted  buds  and 
are  also  in  the  most  favorable  position  for  distri- 
bution by  wind  and  insects  to  healthy  buds. 
Spotted  leaves  should  also  be  promptly  picked 
off.  However,  if  the  early  spring  inspection  and 
eradication  operations  have  been  thorough  and 
there  are  no  diseased  peonies  near  by,  the  foliage 
will  probably  suffer  but  little.  In  wet  seasons 
these  inspections  should  be  made  daily.  In  dry 
weather  less  often  will  suffice.  For  the  nursery- 
men or  the  grower  of  large  numbers  of  peonies, 
this  method  of  control  may  not  be  profitable,  but 
for  the  small  grower  or  in  the  private  garden 
where  a  relatively  small  number  of  clusters  are 

253 


THE  BOOK  OF  THE  PEONY 

planted,  it  will  be  found  entirely  practicable  and 
profitable.  Even  in  a  large  area  I  believe  the 
eradication  measures  I  have  outlined  are  worthy 
a  thorough  trial. 

Conclusions. — The  ultimate  end  and  object 
of  all  plant  disease  investigations  is  control.  It 
must  be  evident  from  what  has  preceded  that  our 
knowledge  of  the  diseases  of  the  peony  is  limited, 
indeed,  that  most  of  it  is  yet  to  be  discovered. 
Naturally  then  our  suggestions  as  to  control  can- 
not be  specific.  They  must  be  general  and  they 
cannot  betaken  as  positive  recommendations,  only 
suggestions  based  on  limited  knowledge  as  to  the 
most  likely  lines  along  which  success  is  to  be  ex- 
pected. Spraying  cannot  of  course  get  at  the 
root  troubles  and  our  past  experience  and  the 
ornamental  character  of  the  plant  both  discourage 
this  as  a  means  of  protecting  the  parts  of  the  plant 
above  ground.  Sanitary  measures  involving  the 
prompt  eradication  of  the  diseased  parts,  as  I  have 
already  suggested  for  the  most  of  the  diseases  de- 
scribed, offer  the  most  practicable  and  satisfac- 
tory methods  for  the  control  of  the  various  mala- 
dies to  which  this  beautiful  ornamental  is  subject. 

254 


INDEX 


Adolphe  Rousseau  peony,  54,  83, 

84,  115 
Adonis  peony,  107 
Advice,  disinterested,  122 
Agnes  Mary  Kelway  peony,  84 
Albert  Crousse  peony,  84 
Alexandre  Dumas  peony,  50,  82,  84 
Alfred  de  Musset  peony,  84 
Alice  de  Julvecourt  peony,  84 
Alsace-Lorraine  peony,  58,  83,  84 
American  Peony  Society,  64,  66,  80 
Anthracnose,  243 
Ants,  172 

Arnoldus  de  Villanova,  41 
Artificial  shade,  movable  cover,  168 

cone  cover,  169 
Asa  Gray  peony,  53,  83,  85 
Augustin  d'Hour  peony,  85 
Aurore  peony,  54,  82,  85 
Auguste  Villaume  peony,  85 
Avalanche  peony,  53,  82,  85,  115 
Avante  Garde  peony,  85,  109 

B 

Baroness  Schroeder  peony,  47,  82, 

86,  105 
Barr,  Peter,  47 
Bartram,  John,  56 
Bartram,  list  of  John,  203 
Beaute  de  Villecante  peony,  86 
Bed  for  peonies,  142 
Bibliography,  233-236 
Blanche    de    Chateau    Futu    tree 

peony,  111 
Borders,  130,  136,  140,  141 
Botan,  194 
Botrytis  blot,  47 
Boule  de  Neige  peony,  86 
Bridesmaid  peony,  86 


Calot,  M.,  52 

Caroline  d'ltalie  tree  peony,  112 

Catalogues,  120 

Chiswick,  peonies  at,  48 

Claire  Dubois  peony,  86 

Colour  nomenclature,  123 

Colours,  78 

Compost,  147,  148 

Couronne  d'Or  peony,  52,  83,  86 

Cross-breeding,  182-184 

Equipment,  184 
Crousse,  M.,  53 
Cultivating,  160,  161 
Cussy,  Comte  de,  52 
Cutting,  166-168 


Date  to  begin  planting,  151 
De  Candolle  peony,  86,  137 
Delachei  peony,  86 
Dessert,  Auguste,  peony,  27, 52,  62, 

148 
Dioscorides,  35 
Disbudding,  162 
Diseases  of  the  peony,  239 
Distance  apart  for  planting,  142 
Dorchester  peony,  61,  87 
Drainage,  138 

Dr.  Bretonneau  peony,  50,  87 
Due  de  Wellington  peony,  83,  87 
Duchesse  de  Nemours  peony,  52, 

82,  87,  137,  166 
Duchesse  d'Orleans  peony,  50,  87 


Edulis  superba  peony,  46,  59,  87. 

137 
Eugenie  Verdier  peony,  52,  82,  87 
Extending  period  of  bloom,  105 


255 


INDEX 


Felix  Crousse  peony,  53,  83,  87 

Fertilisers,  163 

Festiva  Maxima  peony,  55,  82,  94, 

115,  125,  136 
Flag  of  War  peony,  88 
Floral  Treasure  peony,  63,  88 
Folk  lore,  198 
Fragrance,  80 
Fragrans  maxima  plena  tree  peony, 

219 
Frances  Shaylor  peony,  62,  88 
Frances  Willard  peony,  62,  88 
Fungus  of  tree  peony,  246 


Genealogical  register  of  tree  peonies, 

189 
General  de  Boisdeffre  peony,  83,  88 
Geo.  \V.  Tryon  peony,  88 
Germaine  Bigot  peony,  54,  82,  88 
Gerard,  John,  42 
Gigantea  peony,  88 
Gismonda  peony,  83,  89 
Glasnevin,  peonies  at,  48 
Gloire  de  Chas.  Gombault  peony, 

89,  115 
Globosa  tree  peony,  219 
Glory  of  Shanghai  tree  peony,  219 
Grandiflora   Nivea   Plena   peony, 

46,  50,  83,  89 
Grandiflora  peony,  61,  89 
Grover  Cleveland  peony,  60,  83,  89 
Guerin,  Modeste,  peony,  50 


Helene  Leslie  peony,  47, 
Highland  Park,  135 
Hollis,  George,  61 


Jacques,  M.,  49 
James  Kelway  peony,  82,  89 
Jeanne  d'Arc  tree  peony,  219 
Jessie  Shaylor  peony,  62,  90 


Karl  Rosenficld  peony,  63,  83,  90 
Kelway,  James,  47 


Kelway's  Glorious  peony,  47,  81 

90 
Kew  Gardens,  48,  136,  199,  200 


Lady  Alexandra  Duff  peony,  90 
Lady  Leonora  Bramwcll  peony,  90 
Lamartine  (Calot)  peony,  83,  91 
Lamartine    (Lemoine)    peony,   55, 

91 
Lambertinne  tree  peony,  219 
Landscape  effects,  130,  135-138 
La  Fee  peony,  90 
La  Fiancee  peony,  55,  91 
La  France  peony,  91 
La  Lorraine  (hybrid)  peony,  114 
La  Perle  peony,  91 
La  Rosiere  peony,  83,  91 
La  Tendresse  peony,  82,  91 
La  Tulipe  peony,  52,  91 
I^af  blotch,  244 
Le  Cygne  peony,  55,  83,  92 
Legends,  198 

Le  Prin temps  peony,  92,  109 
Lemoine,  Victor,  54 
Lemon,  M.,  49 

L'Esperance  (hybrid)  peony,  114 
Livingstone  peony,  53,  82,  92,  115 
Location,  139,  140 
Loddige,  46 
Louise  Mouchelet  tree  peony,  219 

M 
Madame  Auguste  Dessert  peony, 

92 
Madame       Barillet      Deschamps 

peony,  92 
Madame  Bucquet  peony,  83,  92 
Madame  Calot  peony,  83,  93 
Madame  Crousse  peony,  52,  82,  93 
Madame  de  Galhau  peony,  53,  83, 

93 
Madame  de  Vatry  peony,  50,  83, 93 
Madame  de  Verneville  peony,  53, 

83,93 
Madame  D.  Treyeran  peony,  54,93 
Madame  Ducel  peony,  53,  93,  115 
Madame  Emile  Galle  peony,  53,  93 


256 


INDEX 


Madame   Emile   Lemoine   peony, 

55,  94 
Madame  Geissler  peony,  94 
Madame  Jules  Dessert  peony,  83, 

94 
Madame  Laffay  tree  peony,  219 
Madame  Lemoine  peony,  94 
Madame  Lemonier  peony,  52,  82, 

95,  115,  166 

Madame  Mechin  peony,  83,  95 
Madame  Stuart-Low   tree  peony, 

112 
Madamoiselle  Rousseau  peony,  53, 

95 
Mai  Fleuri  peony,  95,  109 
Main  list  of  peonies,  84-102 
Manure,   143,  145,  146,  147,  148, 

161,  163 
Marcelle  Dessert  peony,  54,  95 
Mareehal  MacMahon  peony,  95 
Marguerite  Gerard  peony,  53,  95 
Marie  Crousse  peony,  82,  95 
Marie  Jacquin  peony,  53,  81,  82, 

96,  115 

Marie  Lemoine  peony,  82,  96,  115 
Martha  Bulloch  peony,  62,  83,  96 
Mary  Woodbury  Shaylor  peony, 

62,  83,  96 
Massing  peonies,  135,  137 
Mathilde  de  Roseneck  peony,  83, 

96,  167 
Mechin,  Etienne,  54 
Messagere  peony,  96,  109 
Miller,""  Philip,  45 

Milton  Hill  peony,  61,  82,  97 
Mireille  peony,  82,  97 
Miss  Salway  peony,  47,  97 
Modele  de  Perfection  peony,  53, 

82,  97 
Modeste  Guerin  peony,  50,  97 
Monsieur  Dupont  peony,  52,  82,  97 
Monsieur  Jules  Elie  peony,  53,  82, 

97,  115 

Monsieur  Martin  Cahuzac  peony, 

54,  83,  98,  115 
Mosaic  disease,  242 
Mrs.  Gwyn  Lewis  peony,  98 
Mrs.  McKinley  peony,  60,  98 
Mulching,  148,  158-160,  161 


Multicolore  peony,  98 
Mythology  of  peony,  32 


Names — familiar,  42 
Necham,  40 
Nematode  worm,  240 


Octavie  Demay  peony, 
Order  of  bloom,  106 
Ordering,  131 


P.  Albiflora,  18,  29,  56,  114,  162, 
164,  220.  224 

Candida,  224 

Festiva,  224 

Festiva  Maxima,  55,  88,   82, 
115,  125,  136 

Fragrans,  45,  224 

Humei,  19,  45,  59,  224 

Pottsii,  46,  59,  224 

Reevesii,  46,  59,  225 

Rubescens,  225 

Vestalis,  225 

Whitleyi,    19,    45,    225.      See 
also  names  of  other  varie- 
ties in  Chap.  Ill 
P.  Anomala,  30,  45,  120,  225,  227 

Insignis,  225 

Intermedia,  225 
P.  Arietina,  29,  220,  225 
P.  Brownii,  30,  220,  225 
P.  Cambessedesii,  220,  226 
P.  Corallina,  30,  35,  45,  47,  49,  220, 
226 

Broteri,  226 

Russii,  226 

Russii  Major,  109 

Triternata,  226 
P.  Coriacea,  220,  226 
P.  Corsica,  220 
P.  Decora,  30,  120,  226 

Alba,  227 

Elatior,  227 

Pallasii,  227 
P.  Delavayi,  227 

Angustiloba,  227 


257 


INDEX 


P.  Emodi,  220,  227 
P.  Intermedia,  225 
P.  Latifolia,  229 

rubra  plena,  229 
P.  Lusitanica,  45,  226 
P.  Lutea,  31,  106,  113,  220,  228 
P.  Lutea  plenissima,  46 
P.  Mlokosewitsckii,  220,  228 
P.  Moutan 

Best  varieties,  111,  219 

Cultivation,  210 

Description,  19,  30,  187,  220 

Fertilising,  212 

Forcing,  213 

In  America,  202 

In  China,  188 

In  England,  111,  199 

In  Japan, 194 

Location  and  soil,  209 

Planting,  210 

Propagation,  214-217 
P.  Moutan 

Banksii,  200,  203 

Papaveracea,  200 

Rawsei,  203 

rosea,  200 
P.  Obovata,  220,  228 
P.  Officinalis,  19,  21,  28,  35,  37,  40, 
45,  47,  56,  57,  58,  109,  137, 
138,  220,  228 

alba  plena,  110 

Albicans,  19,  228 

Anemoneflora,  19,  228 

Blanda,  228 

Carnescens,  228 

La  Negresse,  110 

lobata,  110,  228 

Rosea,  228 

Rosea  Plena,  110 

Rubra,  228 

Sabini,  19,  228 
P.  Paradoxa,  220,  229 

Fimbriata,  229 
P.  Peregrina,  29,  30,  45,  57,  220, 
225,  229 

Humilis,  229 

Microcarpa,  229 
P.  Sinensis,  29,  106 
P.  Suffruticosa,  see  P.  Moutan 


P.  Tenuifolia,  30,  45,  56,  107,  220, 

229 
P.  Veitchii,  220,  229 
P.  Wittmaniana,  30,  51,  108,  220, 

229 
P.  Wittmaniana  rosea,  47,  109 
Parkinson,  John,  21,  22,  43 
Peonies  planted  with  other  flowers, 

137 
Peony  as  food,  40,  46,  225 
Peony  in  Medicine,  31,  32,  34,  40, 

42,  43,  44 
Peony  lantern,  188 
Peter   Barr  peonv    (see   Insignis\ 

225 
Philippe  Rivoire  peony,  98 
Philomele  peony,  98 
Pierre  Dessert  peony,  83,  99 
Pierre  Duchartre  peony,  99,  115 
Planting 

Autumn,  152 

depth,  155, 156 

labels,  157 

on  paper,  153 

record  of,  157,  158 

Spring,  152 

time  for,  151,  153,  154 
Pliny,  33, 34 
Potts,  John,  46 
President  Taft  peony,  99 
Prices,  125,  128 
Primevere  peony,  55,  83,  99 
Prince,  Wm.,  57 
Prince's  catalogue,  203,  204 
Princess  May  peony,  99 
Principal  Species,  tabulation  of,  28 
Propagation,  164,  175-184 

division,  175 

from  seed,  179 

hand-pollination,  181-184 


Questions  to  be  asked  before  pur- 
chasing, 122,  124 


Raphael  peony,  53,  83,  99 
Reine  Elizabeth  tree  peony,  11 
Reine  Hortense  peony,  82,  99 


258 


INDEX 


Richardson,  John,  60 

Robert  Fortune  tree  peony,  219 

Root  gall,  239 

rot,  241 
Rosa  Bonheur  peony,  99 
Rose-bugs,  170-172 
Rose  d'Amour  peony,  99 
Rubens  peony,  83,  99 
Rubra  Superba  peony,  100,  115 
Rubra  Triumphans  peony,  100 


Salm  Dyck,  Prince  de,  51 

Salter,  46 

Samarang  tree  peony,  219 

Sarah  Bernhardt  peony,  55,  83, 100 

Sclerotinia  stem  rot,  246 

Shakespeare,  96 

Short  lists  of  peonies,  82,  83 

Simonne  Chevalier  peony,  82,  100 

Size  and  season,  79 

Soil,  best  for  peonies,  140 

how  to  prepare,  141 
Solange  peony,  83,  100 
Solfatare  peony,  52,  83,  100 
Souvenir  de  Ducher  peony,  219 
Souvenir  de   l'Exposition  I'niver- 

selle  peony,  82,  101 
Souvenir  de  Madame  Knorr  peony, 

219 
Stanley  peony,  101 
Stephania  peony,  60,  82,  101 
Supports,  164-166 
Suzanne  Dessert  peony,  55, 82,  101 


Terry,  H.  A.,  59 
The  Bride  peony.  101 


Therese  peony,  83,  101 
Thurlow,  T.  C,  62 
Time  for  peony  to  become  estab- 
lished, 119 
Top  soil  and  manure,  141,  142,  143 
Tourangelle  peony,  82,  101 
Transplanting,   152 
Tree  peony,  see  P.  Moutan 
Trench  for  peonies,  142-146 
Triomphe  de  l'Exposition  de  Lille 

peony, 101 
Triumphans    Gaudavensis   peony, 

101 
Types,  details  of,  75-77 


Umbellata  Rosea  peonv,  102,  115, 
137 


Venus  peony,  82,  102 
Victoire  de  la  iVfarne  peony,  28 
Victor  Hugo  peony,  102 
Ville  de  Saint  Denis  peony,  219 

W 
Walter  Faxon  peony.  61,  83,  102 
Water  Lily  peony,  102 
Watering,  144,  161,  162 
Weeding,  161 
Whetzel,  H.  H.,  237 
Wisley,  peonies  at,  48 
Wittmaniana  hybrids,  47,  109 


Mountains,  113 


fxomrr  library 


